JP7283608B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine generally includes a variable ball entry device provided in a game area where game balls flow down or roll. A variable ball entry device is also known in which a game ball flows down or rolls (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325811

Here, there is still room for improvement in the configuration for specifying the behavior of the game ball.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of appropriately specifying the behavior of a game ball.

The present invention
a shooting means for shooting a game ball based on a player's shooting operation;
a ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means;
grant determination means capable of executing grant determination of granting a privilege to a player when a game ball enters the ball entering means;
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination by a predetermined effect means when the grant determination means performs the grant determination;
distribution means for distributing game balls shot by the shooting means to a plurality of paths;
a grasping means for grasping the ball passage of each path;
A calculating means capable of calculating a predetermined ratio that can occur within the range of normal operation of the gaming machine using the plurality of ball passing results grasped by the grasping means;
with
The calculation means is capable of executing the calculation processing so that the ball passing result in a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than in a normal state is not included in the predetermined ratio,
a first control means comprising at least the provision determination means, the grasping means and the calculation means;
A second control means comprising at least the effect executing means;
has
The first control means is provided separately from the second control means, and includes means capable of outputting the calculation result of the calculation means to means provided so as not to be visually recognized by the player ,
It is characterized by comprising means capable of updating the control state for outputting the calculation result when the number of game balls passing through the predetermined passage area reaches a predetermined specific number. do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably specify the behavior of the game ball.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which decompose|disassembles and shows a accessory apparatus. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an exploded rotator unit that constitutes the accessory device. It is a top view which shows a rotary body unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows role product control processing. 4 is a flow chart showing data setting; It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 4 is a flowchart showing control start processing; It is a flowchart which shows a process during control. It is a flow chart which shows processing for distribution. It is a flow chart which shows prize-winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round; It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing pattern table; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between opening/closing patterns during a round and allocation timings; In the second embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result table for the first working port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result table for the second working port. . FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operation opening and the sorting timing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operation opening and the sorting timing as a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing setting processing for each round, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing opening/closing processing in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for each opening/closing pattern; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing pattern table in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an allocation table for each opening/closing pattern; In 6th Embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the process for production|presentation performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing pattern table, (b) a flowchart showing an opening handling process, and (c) a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of each special effect. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing opening/closing processing in the seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operation opening and the distribution timing, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of each effect mode. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing opening/closing timing setting processing in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each opening timing table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operation opening and the sorting timing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game control processing in 9th Embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the common pending number and the variable display time of the game round, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining overlap between the common pending number and V allocation. . FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for distribution. 4 is a flowchart showing control start processing; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operation opening and the sorting timing; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing opening/closing timing setting processing in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the opening pattern is changed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the opening pattern is changed; As a modified example of the ninth embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of a accessory device according to a twelfth embodiment; It is a top view which shows a rotary body unit. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows prize-winning processing. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for a passing area; 9 is a flowchart showing processing for detecting a left passing area; 9 is a flowchart showing detection processing of a right passing area; 10 is a flow chart showing processing for detecting a depth passing area; 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing; 7 is a flowchart showing comparison processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each set value; 4 is a flowchart showing output processing; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing output processing in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing error processing. (a) is a flowchart showing RTC effect processing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the set time for RTC effect and error command output. 7 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the RTC effect and error notification; (a) is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing fraud reporting processing. 29 is a flow chart showing processing for passing regions in the fourteenth embodiment;

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area to be described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A display light-emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 .

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 72 in the front door frame 14 . When the shooting handle 60 is operated, a game ball is shot toward the game area from a game ball shooting mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13 . In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 60, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed.

A game area is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13 . The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24 , and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for guiding the game ball to the game area, and the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism when the player rotates the shooting handle 60 is It is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 34 .

The guide rail 34 is formed on one side of the game area so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the department side. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a range defined as a game area on the game board 24 by router processing. Each opening includes a general prize winning port 35, a first operating port (first starting ball entry portion) 38, a second operating port (second starting ball entry portion) 39, a accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display section 43, a character item display section 44, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning port 35, the first actuation port 38, the second actuation port 39 and the accessory device 150, it is detected by a detection sensor (first actuation sensor 38a) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. , second actuation sensor 39c, entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 6, etc.)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are dispensed based on the detection results. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 and when a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out, and the ball enters the general winning port 35. When a ball is generated, 8 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number may be different.

In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 45.例文帳に追加The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 46 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being stopped. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the game ball entering the out port 45, the game ball entering the accessory device 150, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, or the through gate 41 Entering a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The accessory device 150 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 24 . The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction below the accessory device 150 on the game board 24 . Two first operating ports 38 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory device 150 , and the second operating port 39 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right first operating ports 38 . In relation to the role device 150, the left and right first operation ports 38 are arranged so as to sandwich the role device 150, and a game ball that does not enter the role device 150 is placed in one of the first operation ports. 38 can be reached (a prize can be won). In addition, the horizontal distance between both the first operation openings 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or larger than the diameter of one game ball, and the first operation opening 38 and the accessory device 150 are spaced apart. A game ball can flow down.

Also, the second operation port 39 is arranged below the accessory device 150 . The second working port 39 is arranged slightly lower than both the first working ports 38, and the game ball that has not entered the accessory device 150 or the first working port 38 can reach the second working port 39. (Possible to enter).

The second operation port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to an electric accessory driving portion 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory driving portion 39b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and It is placed in either open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 39a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the second operation port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is opened, the second operation port 39 can be entered.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and a state in which the game ball to the second operation opening 39 is likely to win, A configuration in which the electric accessory 39a is switched may be employed. Alternatively, the electric accessory 39a may be defective, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.例文帳に追加

A main display portion 43 and a character object display portion 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47 . That is, the main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls can be seen in front of these display portions 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

In the main display portion 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each operation port 38, 39 is clearly displayed by displaying a pattern or the like.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by other types of display devices such as CRT, dot matrix and the like. The patterns displayed on the main display unit 43 include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. The displayed configuration and the like are conceivable.

In the character item display unit 44, the winning of the through gate 41 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed. indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 41 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the display part 44 for the accessory and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operation opening 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 42 is provided with a pattern display device 51 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. The pattern display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

A first holding light-emitting portion 54 and a second holding light-emitting portion 55 corresponding to the main display portion 43 are provided in a portion of the decorative member 47 below the main display portion 43 . In the first holding light emitting part 54, a plurality of (more specifically, four) light emitting parts are arranged side by side. The number of pending items is displayed by lighting the part 54 . In the second holding light emitting part 55, a plurality of (more specifically, four) light emitting parts are arranged side by side. The number of reserved items is displayed by lighting the part 55 . A third holding light-emitting portion 56 corresponding to the character object display portion 44 is provided in a portion of the decorative member 47 below the character object display portion 44 . The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 41 is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by lighting the third suspension light emitting part 56.例文帳に追加It should be noted that part or all of the holding light emitting units 54 to 56 may be configured to be displayed by part of the pattern display device 51, or the like.

The accessory device 150 becomes an open state on the condition that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the entry of a game ball to the accessory device 150 becomes possible. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and then enters a V winning hole provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and a jackpot state occurs.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5(a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 5(b) is a plan view showing a simplified configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is a plan view of the rotator unit 180. FIG.

The role product device 150 is roughly composed of a role product unit 160 and a rotator unit 180 . As shown in FIG. 6, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 with screws. The base frame 161 is vertically partitioned by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161 . The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

A pair of opening/closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 is provided on both left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161 . A passage forming member 171 and a driving portion fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening/closing accessory driving portions 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back of the driving portion fixing plate 172. there is One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive portion fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening and closing accessory driving portion 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening and closing accessory 168. Concatenated. Therefore, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened by driving the opening/closing accessory driving section 173 .

To explain the opening operation in detail, each opening and closing accessory 168 stands upward when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited), and each tip approaches the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening/closing accessory 168 opens outward, and between the tip of each opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167, there is a game ball. A gap larger than one can be created. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each openable accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is in an open state. Even when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening and closing accessory 168 stands up), when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited) (When the opening and closing accessory 168 is open to the outside). It may be configured so that it can enter the object device 150 . For example, when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is A configuration in which the same gap becomes larger when driven is conceivable.

In addition, the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is configured such that it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the game machine by the passage forming member 171 and the drive section fixing plate 172, and the back side of the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is covered by the cover member 174. there is

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161 . An extending wall 175a formed in the upper part of the front frame 175 extends upward from the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 is forwardly moved by the extending wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 is formed with a passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163. Further, a game ball passage 178 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the far side of the passage plate 177 (Fig. 5(b)). The passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178, and the width of the passage plate 177 is narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, so that the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 It is guided to passageway 178 . The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. - 特許庁An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178 , and the game ball entering the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179 . As a result, entry of a game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. The entrance sensor 179 is configured by a well-known proximity sensor.

A rotator unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be positioned below the passage forming member 171 . The rotor unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191, as shown in FIG.

The guide passage forming member 181 is formed with a recess 182 recessed downward at substantially the center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper opening of the recess 182 . The guide passage 183 is bilaterally symmetrical and slopes down from the center of the back side toward the center of the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is positioned at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161 . The center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is positioned vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160 . A passage wall 183a forming the innermost center of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage walls 183a, and a horizontally extending passage cover 184 is formed above the inner guide passage 183. . However, an entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, and in a plan view (see FIG. 8), the inner portion of the guide passage 183 is configured such that only the center of the inner portion is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184 a overlaps the exit of the game ball passage 178 , the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 reliably reaches the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side.

A ball distribution portion 185 is formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side. The ball distribution portion 185 has an inclined surface that slopes downward from its center toward both the left and right sides. Therefore, the game balls that have reached the guide passage 183 are sorted to either the left or the right. Then, it rolls along the slope of the guide passage 183 and is guided to the near side of the guide passage 183 . A lead-out portion 186 inclined toward the recess 182 is formed on the front side of the guide passage 183 .

A V-winning opening 182a is formed on the bottom surface of the concave portion 182 . The V winning opening 182a communicates with the V winning passage 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, a V winning path 191a is provided with a V winning path 192, and a game ball passing through the V winning path 191a is detected by the V winning path 192. FIG.

A side surface of the concave portion 182 is formed with an outlet 182b. The exit 182b communicates with a discharge passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the exit 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the discharge passage 191b. In this case, a sensor 193 for removal is provided in the passage 191b for removal, and a game ball passing through the passage 191b for removal is detected by the sensor 193 for removal. Note that the V winning sensor 192 and the missing sensor 193 are configured by well-known proximity sensors. In addition, game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the exit passage 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown).

A rotating body driving portion 194 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below. passes through. A rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. Note that the rotor drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the recessed portion 182 of the guide passage forming member 181 and is positioned within the recessed portion 182 . Then, the rotating body 201 rotates counterclockwise as the rotating body driving section 194 is driven. Ten inwardly recessed ball guide portions 202 are formed on the outer periphery of the rotor 201, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at regular intervals. Of these, nine ball guide portions 202 are bottomed outlet guide portions 203 , and one ball guide portion 202 is bottomless V prize winning port guide portion 204 . The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to become lower toward the outside. Each ball guide portion 202 is large enough to accommodate one game ball, and a game ball drawn out from the lead-out portion 186 of the guide passage 183 enters one of the ball guide portions 202 . In this case, the game ball entering the V winning opening guiding portion 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the outlet passage 191b through the outlet 182b.

Further, in this embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to detect the rotational position of the rotor 201 . The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other with a predetermined interval. A light-receiving element is arranged at a position facing each other. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on a sensor substrate 197, and the sensor substrate 197 is provided between both arm portions 196a and 196b of the rotational position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that a cut bang 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is positioned.

The cut bang 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut bang 198, and only when the notch 198a passes between the arms 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates, light from the light emitting element is emitted. of light reaches the light receiving element. A notch portion 198a is formed in correspondence with the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer circumference of the rotating body 201, so that it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element has detected the light from the light emitting element. , the rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes the front side of the lead-out portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between the arms 196a and 196b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on one of the left and right guide passages 183, more specifically, on the left side of the guide passage 183 on which the outlet 182b is formed. The first distribution member 300 is disposed above the outlet 182 b of the guide passage 183 as a bottom portion that constitutes part of the floor of the guide passage 183 . The first distribution member 300 is arranged on the back side of the outlet 182b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled so that the floor of the guide passage 183 and a distribution state in which the rear end of the first distribution member 300 rotates downward about the rotation axis and slopes downward toward the outlet 182b. .

With the above configuration, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, the guide passage 183 is moved to the left. The distributed game balls pass over the first distribution member 300 using the first distribution member 300 as a floor portion and reach one of the ball guide portions 202 in the rotating body 201 . On the other hand, the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (excited), and the first distribution member 300 is placed in the distribution state, so that the first distribution member 300 tilts toward the lower outlet 182b. , the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is guided to the exit 182b (path 191b for exit) as it is without reaching the rotating body 201. Therefore, the V winning probability (the probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300. FIG.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a warp passage 250 is provided for guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 directly to the V winning passage 191a. The warp path 250 has a passage area 251 through which one game ball can pass, and the passage area 251 is formed by curving backward and downward. More specifically, the passage wall 183a behind the ball distribution portion 185 in the guide passage 183 is formed with an opening (not shown) that opens toward the rear, and the passage area 251 is formed in the opening. The inlet portion 252 is communicated. In addition, on the upper side of the discharge passage forming member 191, a V guide passage 260 through which one game ball can pass toward the V winning passage 191a is formed. The exit portion 253 of the passage area 251 in the passage 250 is communicated. The V guide passage 260 is formed to be inclined downward toward the V prize passage 191a, and the front end 262 of the V guide passage 260 communicates with the V prize passage 191a.

With the above configuration, when a game ball that has reached the guide path 183 is guided toward the warp path 250 , it passes through the passage area 251 in the warp path 250 and is led out to the V guide path 260 . Then, the game ball passes through the V guiding path 260, enters the V winning path 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

Here, in the upstream (forward) of the entrance portion 252 of the warp passage 250, the inflow of game balls into the warp passage 250 is regulated (distribution to the warp passage 250 or distribution to the left and right in the guide passage 183 is controlled. a second distribution member 310 is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive section 310a (electromagnetic solenoid). It is displaced between a non-distribution state in which it is arranged in front and a distribution state in which it is arranged above it and is not arranged in front of the inlet portion 252 . That is, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not excited) and is in the non-distribution state, the game ball cannot flow into the warp passage 250, and the guide passage 183 Distributed left and right. On the other hand, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven (excited state) and is in the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the warp passage 250 (rear). It is led directly to the V winning path 191a in no time. That is, the V winning probability (the probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the second distribution member 310. FIG.

In addition, the ball distribution part 185 in the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 has a rearward descending surface so that the game balls can be distributed not only to the left and right but also to the rear. However, when the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distributing state, the second distributing member 310 is arranged on the above-mentioned downwardly inclined surface, and although it is in the non-distributing state In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the game ball is about to be distributed to the side of the downward slope and the game ball stays there.

In this embodiment, the period until the winning game ball 150 reaches the position (ball sorting section 185) to be sorted by the second sorting member 310 is about 0.3 sec. The passage length is set so that Also, the period until the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 reaches the position to be distributed by the first distribution member 300 (on the first distribution member 300) is about 0.5 sec. The path length is set to .

The game ball entering the accessory device 150 described above rolls on the ball receiving plate 163 to enter the game ball passage 178 . In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179 . A game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 reaches a ball sorting portion 185 formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side. Then, on condition that the second distribution member 310 arranged in the ball distribution portion 185 is in a non-distribution state, the balls are distributed to either the left or right guide passage 183 . Then, it is guided to the lead-out portion 186 by rolling along the guide passage 183 on the sorted side. The game ball guided to the lead-out portion 186 rolls along the slope of the lead-out portion 186 and is led out into the concave portion 182 . However, when distributed to the left side in the ball distributing portion 185, the first distributing member 300 must be in a non-distributing state to lead out to the concave portion 182 side. In other words, the game ball guided to the left guide passage 183 may be led out to the recessed part 182 side, or may be led out as it is to the exit 182b.

Inside the recess 182, the rotating body 201 always rotates at a constant speed, and the game ball drawn into the recess 182 and entering the outlet guide section 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the missing sensor 193 . On the other hand, the game ball drawn into the concave portion 182 and entering the V winning opening guide portion 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 . Then, when detected by the V winning sensor 192, a jackpot state occurs.

When the game ball reaches the ball distribution portion 185, if the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball can be sent not only to the left or right guide passage 183 but also to the warp passage 250 side. are distributed. By being distributed to the warp path 250 side, it is directly detected by the V prize sensor 192 without being distributed by the first distribution member 300 or the rotating body 201, and a big win state occurs.

Since only one of the ten ball guides 202 has the V winning opening guide portion 204, the game ball that enters the concave portion 182 of the accessory device 150 has a probability of 1/10 reaching the V winning opening 182a. will enter. In addition, when game balls are detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the sensor 193 for losing, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 71 . Furthermore, the movement of the game ball on the rotating body unit 180 is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161 .

However, the number of ball guide portions 202 and the number of V winning opening guide portions 204 are not limited to those described above. A configuration may be adopted in which V prizes are awarded with a probability of /6, or a configuration in which V prizes are awarded with another probability.

The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc. and the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. 199. These signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device, which will be described later. The main control device detects the ball entering and controls the driving of the driving section. However, some or all of these may be configured to be performed by the later-described production control device side, which is a sub-side control device.

The symbol display device 51 notifies that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39 and the accessory device 150 is in an open state, notifies that a game ball enters the accessory device 150, Distribution rate to both distribution members 300, 310, notification of distribution results, notification of distribution status in rotating body 201, detection of game ball by V winning sensor 192, notification of occurrence of big win state, etc. In addition to the notification during the normal game state, the notification of the round performance during the jackpot state is also performed. It should be noted that the contents of these presentations are sufficient as long as the player can clearly grasp the respective game situations.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is housed in a board box 83 made of the like. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the board box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is sent. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display in accordance with instructions from the main control device 81, and the performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, as shown in FIG. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Then, through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The controller assembly unit 93 comprises a payout controller 97 and a power supply and launch controller 98 . The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 60 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

A main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as already described, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power supply and a firing control. A device 98 is mounted.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 81, the board box housing the main control board 111 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 112 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 81 and a payout controller 97 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115 , and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115 .

Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112 . Various sensors include a first actuation sensor 38a and a second actuation sensor 39c that detect winning to both actuation openings 38 and 39, and a general winning opening as a winning detection sensor that detects winning to other ball entry sections. A sensor 35a for detecting winning to 35, a sensor 41a for detecting winning to through gate 41, and the like are provided. Various sensors include an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, an exit sensor 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150. FIG. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196, the MPU 112 performs winning determination (ball entering determination) for each ball entering portion, and determines the position of the rotor 201. Grasping. Also, in the MPU 112, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first actuation opening 38 or the second actuation opening 39. FIG.

An output side of the MPU 112 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, there are various drive units such as an electric accessory drive unit 39b, an open/close accessory drive unit 173, a first apportionment drive unit 300a, a second apportionment drive unit 310a, a rotor drive unit 194, and the like. is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a prize is generated in one of the operation ports 38, 39, or when the opening/closing execution mode based on the prize to the V prize sensor 192 is entered, the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under control, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed. Further, in these cases, drive control of both distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, or drive control of the rotor drive unit 194 is performed.

Further, when a winning lottery based on the winning of both operation ports 38 and 39 is performed, the MPU 112 controls the display of the main display section 43 . Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a is specified, the MPU 112 performs display control of the accessory display unit 44. FIG.

The blackout monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power and launch control 98 and also monitors the output of the power and launch control 98 at a stable 24 volt DC voltage. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81 .

Further, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34, and the game ball is fired by supplying a drive signal from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid fired.

The performance control device 82 has a performance control board 141 on which an MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 142, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 143. A RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 142 drives and controls various light emitting units 54 to 56 and 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on commands received from the main control device 81 . In addition, the command as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control device 100 . Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157 are mounted. It has

The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 155).

The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by the MPU 152, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold stored information. is.

The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 51 . Since the VDP 155 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152 and the video RAM 157 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 51 . The character ROM 156 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 51 , and the display content of the pattern display device 51 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 157 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 112 of Main Control Unit 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various types of counter information to set the jackpot lottery, set the display of the main display section 43, set the display of the symbols of the pattern display device 51, set the display of the character display section 44, and the like. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot type used when judging the jackpot type such as whether or not to execute opening/closing of the opening/closing accessory 168. A type counter C2, an opening type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to the opening state when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, A random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operation port 39 is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 . In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the release type counter CS is stored as acquired information when a prize is won in the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE including a first result display section reserved area Ra and a second result display section reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning to the first working opening 38 or the second working opening 39 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area → second area → third area → Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 are reserved and stored. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 114b. Information for specifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 43, and when starting one game cycle, the execution area AE is moved. Based on the various numerical information stored in the .

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 38 or the second operation opening 39. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display section reservation area Rb.

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a result table (game result information group) in a result table storage area 113a as win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 113 .

Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG. 11(a).

As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the result table, as the game results, a missing result, a direct hit result, and a normal open result are set. The normal open result is a game result in which the opening/closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is opened based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 . In the present embodiment, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened once when the first operation port 38 is won, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened twice when the second operation port 39 is won. is set to be The deviation result is the result that the opening/closing accessory 168 is not in the open state even when the operation openings 38 and 39 are won. In this case, it is not possible to cause the accessory device 150 to win, and a shift to the jackpot state (opening/closing execution mode) cannot be expected. A direct hit result is a result of shifting to a big win state (opening/closing execution mode) just by winning a prize to the operation openings 38 and 39, and even if a V prize does not occur, not to mention a prize to the accessory device 150. , to the jackpot state as described above.

Of the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that result in an outlier is 1, the number of random number values that result in a direct hit is 1, and the rest are normal open results. corresponding values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of opening/closing accessories 168 corresponding to the operation openings 38 and 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100 based on the winning of both the operation openings 38 and 39, and the probability of opening is 1/100. Although the opening and closing accessory 168 is not opened with a probability, the transition to the opening and closing execution mode is performed without passing the V prize, and with a probability of 1/100 the opening and closing accessory 168 is not opened and the opening and closing execution mode is entered. No migration takes place.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which is not provided with a direct hit result and a miss result. However, by including these results, it is possible to diversify the game, and especially if a direct hit result is provided, a game in which winning of the accessory device 150 does not occur frequently due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a machine, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big winning state, and even if it is such a game machine, it is possible to anticipate the effect of increasing the motivation to play.

The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 38 or the second operation opening 39. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display section reservation area Rb.

Random number values for setting the types of jackpot results are stored as a type table (game type information group) in various table storage area 113 d as win/fail information group storage means in ROM 113 .

Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b).

As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the type table, a 16R (round) continuation mode and a continuation rate variation mode are set as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate fluctuation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game fluctuates in the round game.

Here, the round game means that (1) opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed a predetermined upper limit number of times of opening, (2) the total winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 is determined in advance. It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions of reaching the upper limit number is satisfied. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened and closed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to nine.

The maximum number of round games performed in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 times regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, the 16R continuation mode is set so that 16 round games are unconditionally continued. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is established. The continuation condition is that the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game and that the game ball wins V.

The release type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The release type counter CS is updated periodically. However, this update timing is set to be a timing different from the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2. As a result, it is difficult for fraudulent acts to read the update timing of each counter value by some method. The updated open type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 38 or the second operation opening 39, like the other counters C1 and C2. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display section reservation area Rb.

The value of the random number that sets the waiting time (opening timing) from the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 to the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c as standby information group storage means in the ROM 113. (waiting period information group).

Here, the contents of the opening timing table will be described with reference to FIG. 11(c).

As shown in FIG. 11(c), as the opening timing, a plurality of types of waiting time (waiting period) from the winning timing to the operation ports 38, 39 (or closing timing of the previous opening/closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 kinds of waiting times are set in increments of 0.1 sec from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec. The interval (0.1 sec) between these times is set to be shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle) of the game ball. It is becoming difficult to intentionally change (increase) the probability.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. - 特許庁

Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to open state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set to be the same regardless of the game state. That is, a state in which it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a or in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are large in the case of winning (so-called high-frequency support mode), or in which the probability of winning in the opening lottery is lower than that, or the opening in the case of winning A mode such as a state in which the time and the number of openings is small (so-called low-frequency support mode) is not provided. With a configuration having these modes, it is possible to improve the interest because the range of increase and decrease in the number of balls thrown can be increased. Circumstances may arise in which it is necessary to adopt specifications such as setting the winning frequency to both operation ports 38 and 39 low. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, it is difficult for the players to win prizes in the operation ports 38 and 39, and there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may decrease. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the game state, it is possible to expect winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 to some extent even in the normal game state. It is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 to advance the game will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 112 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196 are read, and the states of these various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196 are read. Execute the process of determining and saving the detection information. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is detected by various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball is detected. Sets the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects that a prize has been awarded to the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set. In subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 41 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 41, the number of stored role product reserves stored in the electricity reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 114c. In addition, the production control device 82 executes a process for lighting the third pending light-emitting portion 56 corresponding to the number of stored character product pending storage.

After that, in step S105, after executing the prize winning process for the operation port, this timer interrupt process is terminated. In the winning process for the operation opening, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in either of the operation openings 38 and 39, and when it is determined that the game has won, numerical information such as a big hit random number counter C1 at that time is displayed. is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a.

Concretely, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG.

In step S201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operation opening 38 whether or not the game ball has won the first operation opening 38 (start winning). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first operation hole 38. FIG. In step S204, the value stored in the retention number storage area of the first result display section retention area Ra is read, and the starting retention storage number RaN retained and stored in the first result display section retention area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). In the subsequent step S205, a process of setting the number of opening times of the opening/closing accessory 168 to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "1" to the open number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. After that, in step S206, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is performed, and the winning process ends.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operation opening 38, in step S207, the second operation opening 39 determines whether the game ball has won the second operation opening 39 (start winning). Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to . When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation port 39, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls is set in step S208. In subsequent step S209, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second operation hole 39. FIG. In step S210, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is read, and the start-up reservation number RbN reserved and stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start pending storage number RbN). In the subsequent step S211, a process of setting the number of opening times of the opening/closing accessory 168 to two is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "2" to the above-described opening number counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the process of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be opened due to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S206, and the prize winning processing ends.

On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, if the game ball does not enter either the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, the winning process is terminated.

Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S208 are transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing to be described later.

Here, the information acquisition processing in step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start pending storage set in step S204 or step S210 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). judge. If the starting pending memory number N is equal to the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is. While incrementing by one, the value (hereinafter referred to as common pending number CRN) stored in the total pending number storage area in step S303 is also incremented by one.

In the following step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in the step S103, and the value of the open type counter CS updated in the normal process described later is stored in the corresponding result display holding area. It is stored in the first storage area of the storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by one in step S302.

In other words, when the starting reservation storage number RaN for the first working port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first working port is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the start suspension storage number RaN for the first working port incremented by one in step S302 and the corresponding suspension area Ra.

In addition, when the start reservation storage number RbN for the second operation port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the open type counter CS is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second operation port is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the start suspension storage number RbN for the second working port incremented by one in step S302 and the corresponding suspension area Rb. After executing the process of step S304, the information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when the command for production|presentation is set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S402, the release type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the release type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114 .

In the subsequent step S403, a game control process is executed to advance the game. In this game control process, driving control of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed.

After executing the game control process of step S403, it progresses to step S404 and executes a game state transition process. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the game control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operation port 39 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 39a. A lottery is performed, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 39a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

Thereafter, in step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the release type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 . Also, in step S409, the release type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the release type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The release type counter CS can also be randomly updated.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control processing of step S403 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 16 to 22. FIG.

In the game control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When it is in the open/close execution mode, the game control process without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game progress process of steps S507 to S509. exit. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, regardless of whether or not a prize has been won in the operation ports 38, 39, the game starts (the accessory device triggered by the winning in the operation ports 38, 38). 150 open).

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the accessory device 150 is in the control state. Whether or not it is in the control state includes the period of the opening/closing operation of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 . Determination of whether or not it is in the control state is made on the condition that the character product control flag is stored in the character product control flag storage area in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. do. The above-mentioned accessory control flag is stored when the game result based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 is an opening result (normal opening result in this embodiment), and the operation of the accessory device 150 based on the result is stored. Cleared at the end of the operation (including the waiting period after closing).

When the accessory device 150 is not in the control state, the process proceeds to the game start processing of steps S503 to S506. In the game start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39. FIG. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as it is. If the common pending number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb is set for variable display in step S504. In addition, in step S505, a win/loss determination process for determining the game result of the data set in the data setting process is performed. After executing the control start process to be started, this game control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504, the validity determination process in step S505, and the control start process in step S506 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S607 is executed, and if the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0" executes data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S608 to S613.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is "0". If it is stored, the data stored in the second result display holding area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first start holding storage number RaN is 1 or more. made it As a result, when the reservation information is stored in both the first result display section reservation area Ra and the second result display section reservation area Rb, the second result display section for the second result display section corresponding to the second operation opening 39 Priority is given to the pending information stored in the pending area Rb.

In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S602, the first start reservation storage number RaN in the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In subsequent step S606, the second result display flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is erased; if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display section flag is used to specify which of the reservation information in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb corresponds to the object of this pass/fail judgment. information.

In the following step S607, a shift time command (shift generation information) is set, which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first result display section reservation area Ra, that is, the first operation port 38 A shift-time command including information of correspondence is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.例文帳に追加After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display in the first pending light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the pending number based on the received shift time command.

In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S608, the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion holding area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S609, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display portion reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In the subsequent step S612, the second result display flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is not stored, the second result display flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S613, a shift time command (shift occurrence information) is set which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second result display section reserved area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second operation port 39 A shift-time command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.例文帳に追加After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set at step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display in the second pending light emitting unit 55 in accordance with the decrease in the pending number based on the received shift time command.

Next, the success/failure determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, the data (jackpot random number counter C1) shifted to the execution area AE this time and the result table of the ROM 113 are referenced to determine whether or not the current game result is a direct hit result. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S702, and a process of storing the V prize flag in the various flag storage area 114e is executed. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the open execution mode.

In the following step S703, a direct hit command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S703, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to a direct hit is executed. After that, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

The direct hit command set at step S703 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for the start effect of the opening/closing execution mode based on the direct hit command received.

If it is not a direct hit result in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data shifted to the execution area AE this time (jackpot random number counter C1) and the result table of the ROM 113 are referred to determine whether or not the game result of this time is a losing result. If the result is out, the process proceeds to step S705, and the value set in the opening number counter in step S205 or step S211 in the winning process for the operation port (FIG. 13) is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S706, the off command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S706, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the result of deviation is executed. After that, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

The off command set at step S706 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The performance control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 will not be in the open state based on the received out command.

If it is not a result of deviation in step S704, the normal opening command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S707. Further, in step S704, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the result of normal opening is executed. After that, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

The normal opening command set at step S707 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in the open state based on the received normal open command.

That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning/failure determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 .

Next, the control start processing of step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the control start process, first, in step S801, the opening number counter in the RAM 114 is referred to, and the opening number of the opening/closing accessory 168 is grasped. In subsequent step S802, an open/close timing setting process is executed. In the opening/closing timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 17), the data related to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113 are used. , and sets the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 this time. Specifically, from this process, a numerical value corresponding to how many seconds the opening/closing accessory 168 is to be opened (whether to start driving control of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173) is read from the opening timing table, and stored in the RAM 114. Input to the standby counter provided in the various counter areas 114d. This waiting counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is possible to grasp that it is time to open the opening/closing accessory 168 .

In subsequent step S803, a first distribution setting process is executed. In the first distribution setting process, the first distribution member 300 is placed in the distribution state at the timing when a predetermined first period (0.0 sec) has passed from the opening timing set in step S802. , and the first distribution member 300 is set to the non-distribution state at the timing after a predetermined second period (1.5 sec) has passed.

Then, in step S804, after executing the second distribution setting process, the control start process ends. In the second distribution setting process, the second distribution member 310 is placed in the distribution state at the timing when a predetermined third period (1.8 sec) has passed from the opening timing set in step S802. , and the second distribution member 310 is set to the non-distribution state at the timing when a predetermined fourth period (0.1 sec) has passed.

These timings can be grasped by the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . Specifically, in steps S803 and S804, first, values corresponding to the first and third periods (values corresponding to the timing of shifting from the non-distribution state to the distribution state) are stored in the corresponding distribution counters. input. These distribution counters are updated (decremented) at a predetermined cycle and set to a predetermined value (for example, "0") to determine the displacement (non-distribution state→distribution state) timing of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310. It can be understood that Then, in the later-described distribution processing (FIG. 21), the distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (driving control of the driving units 300a and 310a), and the value corresponding to the period during which the distribution state is maintained is It is input to the same distribution counter. After that, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to grasp the timing of the displacement (from the distribution state to the non-distribution state) again.

That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are displaced is uniquely determined. A period from the timing until the distributing members 300 and 310 are displaced is determined.

Regarding the first to fourth periods, the periods in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state are the periods in which the game balls entering the accessory device 150 can reach the distribution members 300 and 310. is set to be

Next, the game progress processing in the game control processing (FIG. 16) will be described. As described above, the game progress processing is processing that is performed when it is determined in step S502 that the accessory device 150 is in the control state. That is, when it is in the control state in step S502, in-control processing is executed in step S507, distribution processing is executed in step S508, and winning processing is executed in subsequent step S509. , to end the game control process.

First, the processing during control in step S507 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether it is time to open the opening/closing accessory 168 or not. In this determination, it can be confirmed whether or not it is the opening timing by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S802. If it is the opening timing in step S901, opening control processing is executed in step S902. In this process, the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven and controlled to displace the opening and closing accessory 168 to the open state. Further, in step S902, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (uniformly 2 sec in this embodiment) to the open period counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The open period counter is updated (decremented) at a predetermined cycle, and when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is possible to grasp that it is time to close the opening/closing accessory 168 .

Then, in the following step S903, after executing a process of subtracting "1" from the open number counter of the RAM 114, this in-control process is terminated.

If it is not the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening/closing accessory 168. In this process, by referring to the value of the open period counter input in step S902, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the closing timing. If it is the closing timing in step S904, a closing control process is executed in step S905. In this process, by ending the drive control of the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173, the opening and closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

In the subsequent step S906, the open number counter of the RAM 114 is referenced to determine whether or not the remaining open number is "0". If it is "0", control end processing is executed in step S907. In this process, a process for ending the control of the accessory device 150 for one set of pending information is performed. Specifically, confirmation of the presence/absence of an error in each drive unit 173, 300a, 310a, 194, return processing to the initial position, and the like are performed. In the following step S908, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this in-control process is terminated.

The control end command set at step S908 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 15). Based on the received control end command, the effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is ended.

If the number of times of opening is not "0" in step S906, standby period setting processing is executed in step S909. In the standby period setting process, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current standby period (uniformly 1 sec in this embodiment) to the standby period counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

If it is not the closing timing in step S904, after executing the process of step S908 or after executing the process of step S909, this in-control process ends.

Next, the distribution processing of step S508 in the game control processing (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S<b>1001 , it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the first distribution member 300 . This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the first distribution counter in the RAM 114 as described above. Then, when it is the displacement timing, in step S1002, the first distribution control process is executed. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the second period is input to the first distribution counter.

In step S1002, if the current control corresponds to opening twice (opening based on the winning of the second operation opening 39), similar to the processing in step S803, from the opening timing of the opening and closing accessory 168, The first distribution member 300 is placed in the distributed state at the timing when the predetermined first period has passed, and the first distribution member 300 is not distributed at the timing when the predetermined second period has passed. Set to state. In addition, the period from when the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state to the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 for the second time is also referred to as a fifth period. Note that in this embodiment, the fifth period is set to 1.0 sec.

If it is not the time to displace the first distribution member 300 in step S1001, or if the process of step S1002 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S<b>1003 , it is determined whether or not it is time to displace the second distribution member 310 . This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the second distribution counter in the RAM 114 as described above. Then, when it is the displacement timing, in step S1004, the second distribution control process is executed. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive section 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the fourth period is input to the first distribution counter.

In step S1004, if the current control corresponds to opening twice (opening based on the winning of the second operation opening 39), similar to the processing in step S804, from the opening timing of the opening and closing accessory 168, The second distribution member 310 is placed in the distributed state at the timing when the predetermined third period has passed, and the second distribution member 310 is not distributed at the timing when the predetermined fourth period has passed. Set to state. Note that the period from when the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state to when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened for the second time is also referred to as a sixth period. Note that in this embodiment, the sixth period is set to 0.6 sec.

If it is not the time to displace the second distribution member 310 in step S1003, or if the process of step S1004 has been executed, the main distribution process ends.

Next, the winning process of step S509 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, a detection signal from the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has won inside the accessory device 150. FIG. When winning, in step S1102, the winning command within the role is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device . After that, this in-control process is terminated.

The winning command within the role item set at step S1102 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). Based on the received accessory winning command, the performance control device 82 notifies that a prize has been won in the accessory device 150 (notification for drawing attention to the action of the game ball in the accessory device 150). process for

If the entrance sensor 179 is not in the detection state in step S1101 (including already winning), or after executing the process of step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the detection signal from the V winning sensor 192 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the V winning has occurred. When V winning occurs, at step S1104, the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114 to store that a big winning state (transition to opening/closing execution mode) occurs. Then, in step S1105, control end processing is executed, and in step S1106, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device .

The processing of step S1105 is the same as the processing of step S907. The control end command set in the process of step S1106 may be the same as the command of step S908, or may include information indicating that a V prize has been won. Even if it is the same as the command of step S908, since the command for it is output at the time of starting the opening and closing execution mode, the effect control device 82 side can grasp the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and suppresses the increase in the number of commands. It is possible. On the other hand, if the command in step S1106 includes information indicating that a V prize has occurred, the event can be quickly grasped by the production control device 82 side, and a production that congratulates the V prize can be produced. It is possible to perform the timing closer to the V winning timing of the game ball.

When the V winning is not detected in step S1103, or after the processing of step S1106 is executed, this winning processing is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 in the normal processing (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 23 to 28 and the like.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S1202 to determine whether or not the current game result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114 . If the V winning flag is not stored, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

When the V winning flag is stored, the opening/closing execution mode starting process is executed in step S1203. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting opening the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

In subsequent step S1204, type determination processing is executed to determine the type of the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, among the pending information stored in the execution area AE this time, while grasping the jackpot type counter C2, referring to the type table of the ROM 113, the type of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuous mode or the continuation rate variation mode.

In subsequent step S1205, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result of step S1204. If it is the 16R continuation mode, the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1206. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize that the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode.

If the 16R continuation mode is not set in step S1205, or if the process of step S1206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, "15" is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 114d of the RAM 114, and "19" is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the same various counter area 114d. . The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one opening/closing execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 counts the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter for

After executing the process of step S1207, an opening command is set in step S1208. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This opening command includes information as to whether it is the 16R continuation mode or the continuation rate variation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the pattern display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 100 controls the display of the pattern display device 51 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

In the subsequent step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

On the other hand, if it is in the opening/closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. If the standby time for opening has passed, opening/closing processing is executed in step S1211.

Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 . If the opening/closing accessory 168 is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" in step S1302, and timers provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 are activated in step S1303. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter T is "0".

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" or if the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process advances to step S1304 to execute setting processing for each round.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the current setting process is the start timing of each round. Specifically, when the second round counter RC2 is "0", it is determined that it is time to start each round. If it is not the start timing, the setting process is terminated.

In subsequent step S1402, it is determined whether or not the RAM 114 stores a continuation flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the opening/closing execution mode of this time is the continuation rate variation mode, the process of grasping the number of rounds is executed in step S1403. In this process, the value of the first round counter RC1 is referenced to determine which round of the open/close execution mode the round set in the current round setting process is. Then, in step S1404, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 27, the round pattern table defines opening/closing patterns for each round in one opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of types of opening/closing patterns are set for the opening/closing accessory 168 for each round, and an opening/closing pattern A, an opening/closing pattern B, and an opening/closing pattern C are set.

As already explained, in the 16R continuation mode, the round game unconditionally continues up to the 16th round. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the next round is continued when the continuation condition is satisfied. And this continuation condition is that the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game and that the game ball wins the V prize.

In this embodiment, the continuation rate of each round in the continuation rate variation mode is caused to change by varying the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round. More specifically, opening/closing pattern A is easier to continue than patterns B and C. When the opening/closing pattern B and the opening/closing pattern C are compared, the probability of winning the V prize may differ depending on the timing of entering the game ball.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, in the opening/closing pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113, the opening/closing pattern differs depending on how many times the open/close patterns A to C of each round are opened. is set to

For example, in the opening and closing pattern A, during the 19th opening in one round game, the opening times of the 1st to 16th (RC2 = 1 to 16) are longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec) ( 3 times), open for 1.8 sec, and then close for 0.5 sec (also referred to as open/close pattern A1). Also, in the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19), the door is opened for 1.0 sec and then closed for 4.0 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern A2). That is, in the case of A1, the winning of the accessory device 150 is relatively likely to occur in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of A2, although it may occur, it is less likely to occur than in A1.

As for the opening/closing pattern B, in the first to tenth opening times (RC2=1 to 10), the door is opened for 0.2 sec and then closed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern B1). In the 11th to 13th times (RC2=11 to 13), the door is opened for 1.0 sec and then closed for 1.3 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern B2). The 14th to 16th times (RC2=14 to 16) are the same as the open/close pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19), the door is opened for 0.2 sec and then closed for 4.8 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern B3). In other words, in the case of B1 and B3, the winning to the accessory device 150 is almost non-existent due to the firing period, and in the case of B2, the winning can occur at substantially the same level as A2.

As for the opening/closing pattern C, in the first to sixteenth opening times (RC2=1 to 16), the door is opened for 0.2 sec and then closed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern C1). The opening/closing pattern C1 is an opening/closing pattern similar to the opening/closing pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19), the door is opened for 1.0 sec and then closed for 4.0 sec (also called open/close pattern C2). The opening/closing pattern C2 is the same opening/closing pattern as the opening/closing pattern A1. That is, in the case of C1, almost no prize is won in the accessory device 150, and in the case of C2, the same as A2.

In this manner, the opening/closing patterns are different depending on the opening/closing patterns A to C set in each round. Moreover, even in the same round, the opening/closing mode differs depending on how many times the opening/closing is performed.

On the other hand, the operations of the distribution members 300 and 310 are the same in all rounds.

Specifically, for the first distribution member 300, in any of the opening and closing patterns A to C, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened in the first to tenth times (RC2 = 1 to 10). After a period of TA1 (0.0 sec) from the start, it is displaced to the distributed state, after a period of TA2 (0.1 sec) from that displacement, it is displaced to the non-distributed state, and thereafter, is non-distributed for a period of TA3 (1.3 sec). The distribution state is maintained (also referred to as operation pattern VA1). The 11th to 16th times (RC2 = 11 to 16) are displaced to the distributed state after the period TA4 (0.0 sec) from the start of opening of the opening and closing accessory 168, and after the period TA5 (1.0 sec) after that displacement It is displaced to the distribution state, and thereafter the non-distribution state is maintained over TA6 (1.3 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VA2). In the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19), no displacement remains in the non-allocation state (also referred to as operation pattern VA3).

Regarding the second distributing member 310, in any of the opening/closing patterns A to C, the first to 16th opening times (RC2=1 to 16) are not displaced while remaining in the non-distributing state (operation pattern Also called VB1). The 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19) are displaced to the distribution state after the period TB1 (1.0 sec) from the start of opening of the opening and closing accessory 168, and after the period TB2 (0.1 sec) after the displacement It is displaced to the distribution state, and thereafter the non-distribution state is maintained over TB3 (3.9 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VB2).

Here, in each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, the total operation period of the opening time and the closing time at each opening/closing (RC2) is predetermined. That is, regardless of the opening/closing pattern, the operation period during the opening/closing of the 1st to 16th times (RC2=1 to 16) is the first operation period (2.3 sec), and the 17th to 19th times (RC2=1 to 16). 17 to 19) is the second operation period (5.0 sec) during opening and closing.

Further, the operation pattern of each distribution member 300, 310 during the opening/closing execution mode does not change in relation to the opening/closing pattern A1-A2, B1-B3, C1-C2 of the opening/closing accessory 168. That is, regardless of the opening/closing pattern, the first distributing member 300 operates in the operation pattern VA1 during the first to tenth opening/closing (RC2=1 to 10), and in the 11th to 16th opening/closing (RC2=10). 11 to 16), it operates according to the VA2 operation pattern, and at the 17th to 19th operations (RC2=17 to 19), it operates according to the VA3 operation pattern. In addition, the second distribution member 310 operates in the VB1 operation pattern during the 1st to 16th times (RC2=1 to 16) of opening and closing, and operates in the VB2 operation pattern during the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19) of opening and closing. It works with a movement pattern.

In other words, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is 23.0 sec after the start of one round game (when the round game is first opened) (0 sec to 23.0 sec, 2.3 sec x 10 times) It switches from VA1 to VA2, and switches from VA2 to VA3 after 36.8 sec (23.0 sec to 36.8 sec, 23.0 sec + 2.3 sec x 6 times) from the start of the same round game. The operation of VA3 continues until after 51.8 seconds (36.8 seconds to 51.8 seconds, 36.8 seconds+5.0 seconds×3 times).

In addition, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is VB1 after 36.8 sec (0 sec to 36.8 sec, 2.3 sec x 16 times) from the start of one round game (when the round game is first opened). to VB2, and the operation of VB2 continues until 51.8 seconds later (36.8 seconds to 51.8 seconds, 36.8 seconds+5.0 seconds×3 times).

That is, the operation pattern of each distribution member 300, 310 is uniquely determined in each round.

To explain the relationship between each of the opening/closing patterns A to C and the operation pattern of each distribution member in more detail, if the opening/closing pattern is A, during A1 (RC2=1 to 16), the winning to the accessory device 150 is not possible. It occurs relatively easily, and during VA1 (RC2=1 to 10), it is easy to win the V prize (it is difficult to be distributed to the outside side). On the other hand, even during A1 (RC2=1 to 16), during VA2 (RC2=11 to 16), V winning is less likely than during VA1 (more likely to be distributed to the outside). Note that during this A1, distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed (VB1). In the open/close pattern A, when it becomes A2 (RC2=17 to 19), winning to the accessory device 150 is less likely than in A1, but distribution to the outside side by the first distribution member 300 is not performed. (VA3), and distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, if it is a round of the opening/closing pattern A, it is relatively possible to expect V winning in any period (RC2=1 to 19), and the possibility of continuing the round is high.

In the open/close pattern B, during B1 (RC2=1 to 10), almost no winning to the accessory device 150 occurs. It is difficult to divide (VA1). At B2 (RC2=11 to 13), winning to the accessory device 150 is possible, but distribution to the outside by the first distribution member 300 becomes more likely (VA2). During the period of B1 and VA2 (RC2=14 to 16), winning to the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, and even if winning is likely to occur, it is likely to be distributed to the outside side. At B3 (RC2=17 to 19), almost no prizes are awarded to the accessory device 150, but the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the outside side (VA3), and the second distribution is performed. Distribution to the V winning side by the member 310 can occur (VB2). That is, considering the relationship between the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the case of the open/close pattern B round, the V winning occurs during the period B2 (RC2=11 to 13). If not, the possibility of occurrence of V prize is low in other periods, and the possibility of continuation of the round is low.

In the case of the open/close pattern C, during C1 (RC2=1 to 16), the winning of the role device 150 hardly occurs. ) is more likely to win a V prize than during VA2 (RC2=11 to 16). On the other hand, at C2 (RC2=17 to 19), winning to the accessory device 150 is more likely to occur than at C1, and distribution to the outside side by the first distribution member 300 is not performed (VA3 ), and distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 can occur (VB2). In other words, considering the relationship between the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the case of the round of the opening/closing pattern C, the V prize hardly occurs during the period C1, but the V winning occurs during the period C2. We can expect the occurrence of the V prize, and we can expect the continuation of the round.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are the same in each round, the ease of continuing the round differs depending on the opening/closing pattern of each round (RC1). do. Further, the ease of continuing the round (the ease of winning a V prize) also differs depending on the number of times of opening and closing (RC2) in each round.

Returning to the description of the setting process of each round (FIG. 25), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1404, the process of setting the opening/closing pattern of the corresponding round is executed in step S1405. Specifically, the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to the respective patterns A to C. For example, if the opening/closing pattern is A, the flags are stored in the corresponding areas.

If the continuation flag is stored in step S1402, or if the process of step S1405 has been executed, the process advances to step S1406. In step S1406, "9" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM114. The prize counter PC indicates the number of prizes won in one round game, and in this embodiment, when nine game balls win in the accessory device 150 in one round game, the round game ends. Then, in step S1407, after executing the process of setting "19" to the second round counter RC2, this setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the opening/closing process (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S1304, each opening setting process is executed in step S1305.

In each opening setting process, as specifically shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process of step S1402. If the continuation flag is stored, the open/close pattern of the current round is set to A1 in the subsequent step S1502. That is, in the case of the 16R continuation mode, in all rounds (RC1), in all opening times (RC2), the opening/closing pattern of the pattern with the longest opening time is set. Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, the maximum winning number is likely to occur in each round. In this embodiment, in the open/close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the game continues to the next round even if the V prize is not won (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

If the continuation flag is not stored in step S1501 and the mode is the continuation rate variation mode, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, the second round counter RC2 is grasped to grasp how many times the open/close accessory 168 is opened this time in one round. Then, in step S1504, the opening/closing pattern table is referred to from the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113, and in step S1505, the corresponding opening/closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 are set.

In subsequent step S1506, a process of setting an operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 corresponding to the current value of the second round counter RC2 is executed. In this process, the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in the RAM 114 are used. Then, by referring to the opening/closing pattern table, the operation patterns of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are grasped, and values corresponding to the timing of shifting from the non-distribution state to the distribution state are input. As already explained, these distribution counters are updated (decremented) at a predetermined cycle and set to a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that the corresponding displacements of the distribution members 300 and 310 (non-distribution state→ It is possible to grasp that it is the distribution state) timing. Then, in the closing process (step S1321) and the closing time setting process (steps S1324 and S1325), which will be described later, the distributing members 300 and 310 are displaced (distributed state→non-distributed state) and the non-distributed state is performed. A value corresponding to the period during which the minute state is maintained is input to the same distribution counter. After that, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to grasp the timing of the displacement (non-distribution state→distribution state) again.

After executing the process of step S1502 or after executing the process of step S1506, in step S1507, the process of subtracting "1" from the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then this setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the opening/closing process (FIG. 24), after executing each opening setting process in step S1305, the opening process is executed in step S1306. Specifically, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is started to open the opening/closing accessory 168 . Then, in step S1307, an opening command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In addition to information on whether or not the 16R continuation mode is set, this release command includes information about what round the release is (first round counter RC1 information) and what number of times the release is in one round (second round counter RC1 information). information of the round counter RC2) and information of the opening/closing patterns A1-A2, B1-B3, and C1-C2. Based on the received opening command, the effect control device 82 performs effects for notifying the opening/closing pattern, the winning rate of the accessory device 150, the V winning rate when the winning of the accessory device 150 occurs, and the like. Contents are determined, and various devices are controlled so that the determined contents of performance are executed.

If the opening/closing accessory 168 is open in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1308 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", it is determined by the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 whether or not the game ball has won the accessory device 150 in step S1309. If no prize has been won, the main opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by "1" in step S1310. Determined by

In step S1311, when V winning has occurred, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not a continuation flag is stored, and it is grasped whether or not it is the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode. Then, if V winning has not occurred in step S1311, or if 16R continuation mode is selected in step S1312, the process advances to step S1313 to determine whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". . If the number is not "0" and the maximum number of winnings in one round has not been reached, the opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1308, or if the winning counter PC becomes "0" in step S1313, and further, in step S1312, a V winning occurs in the continuity rate variation mode. If so, each process for closing the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed in steps S1314 to S1328.

That is, if the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1313 and the maximum number of winnings has been reached, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not a continuation flag is stored. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1312 described above. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate variation mode is set, in step S1315, a process of clearing the first round counter RC1 to "0" is executed. This process is for terminating the opening/closing execution mode when the maximum number of wins in the round game is reached without V wins occurring in the continuation rate variation mode.

On the other hand, if the timer counter T is "0" at step S1308, or if the winning counter PC is "0" in the 16R continuation mode at step S1314, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, a process of subtracting "1" from the second round counter RC2 is executed. Then, in step S1317, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "0". Further, when a V winning occurs in the continuation rate variation mode in step S1312, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to "0" is executed in step S1318. This process is a process for ending the round game when a V winning occurs in the course of the round game in the continuation rate variation mode.

If it is determined in step S1317 that the second round counter RC2 is "0", or after the processing of step S1318 is executed, then in step S1319 the first round counter RC1 is reset assuming that one round has ended. Execute the process of subtracting "1". Then, in step S1320, a process of storing round update flags in various flag storage area 114e of RAM 114 is executed. The round update flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize that each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round.

When the process of step S1315 is performed (when the maximum number of prizes won in one round is reached without V prizes occurring during the continuity rate variation mode), when the second round counter RC2 is not "0" in step S1317 , or when the process of step S1320 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1321. In step S1321, closing processing is executed. In this process, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is ended, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

Then, in step S1322, it is determined whether or not the first round counter RC1 is "0" and it is the final round of the open/close execution mode. If the first round counter RC1 is not "0", the process advances to step S1323 to determine whether or not the above round update flag is stored. If the round update flag is stored and each process for closing this time corresponds to the end of one round, the process advances to step S1324.

In step S1324, processing for setting the closing time (closing period, waiting period) between rounds is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 sec) is input to the timer counter T.

On the other hand, the round update flag is not stored in step S1323, and each process for closing this time corresponds to each opening (closing) during one round (corresponding to the second round counter RC2). If so, the process proceeds to step S1325. In step S1325, processing for setting the closing time (closing period, standby period) for each opening is executed. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the opening/closing pattern table, the current closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to that time is set to the timer counter. Enter T.

After executing the process of step S1324 or step S1325, a closing command is set in step S1326, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This closing command includes information as to whether each closing process at this time corresponds to the end of one round or to each opening/closing during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1322 that the first round counter RC1 is "0", ending processing is executed in step S1327. In the start process, a standby time for ending the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . In this case, the waiting time information differs depending on the type of opening/closing execution mode (16R continuation mode or continuation rate fluctuation mode), and the 16R continuation mode has a longer waiting time for the ending than the continuation rate fluctuation mode. Wait time information is set. In addition, in the continuation rate variation mode, the standby time information is set so that the longer the open/close execution mode continues (the more times the round game is played), the longer the standby time for the ending. By doing so, even if the opening/closing execution mode ends with a small number of round games, the next game can be quickly shifted to, and the occurrence of the next opening/closing execution mode can be expected. It is possible to switch the player's mind to do so. In other words, the greater the number of times the round game is played in the current opening/closing execution mode, the longer the waiting time for the ending. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

After that, in step S1328, after setting the ending command, the opening/closing process ends. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This ending command includes information such as the waiting time for the ending set in step S1327, the type of open/close execution mode, and the number of times the round game is continued. A performance control device 82 determines the content of performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the pattern display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 100 controls the display of the pattern display device 51 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 23), after executing the opening/closing process in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" in step S1212, and the process proceeds to step S1213. determines whether or not the waiting time for the ending has passed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, in step S1214, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotor 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at initial positions.

In addition, as a normal game state, the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operation opening 39 changes (for example, the opening/closing mode becomes an opening/closing mode in which the second operation opening 39 is easier to win than in other states). , and a game state in which the type or probability of the game result changes when winning the operation ports 38 and 39 (for example, the probability of a direct hit results changes). It is preferable to set to those game states in the transition process.

After the transition processing at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode in step S1214 is finished, in step S1215, after execution of the opening/closing execution mode end processing, the game state transition processing is finished. In the closing process of the opening/closing execution mode, the continuation flag and the like used during the opening/closing execution mode are erased. Further, in step S1215, information indicating that one opening/closing execution mode has ended is output to the outside by, for example, stopping the jackpot signal output in step S1209. As a result, the start and end of one opening/closing execution mode can be grasped by the hall computer of the game hall.

The relationship between the opening/closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 during the opening/closing execution mode and the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. explain. For details of each opening/closing pattern, refer to FIG. 28 again.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), the opening/closing accessory 168 shifts from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, after that (after 0.1 sec), at the timing t2, the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state. In this situation (RC2=1 to 10), the second allocating member 310 is not displaced, so that the second allocating member 310 does not distribute the wins to the V winning side.

In the situation of this operation pattern VA1, if the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is A1, it is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is maintained until the timing of t6 (after 1.8 seconds). . In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) during which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is very small. In the pattern, there is a low possibility that the first sorting member 300 sorts to the outside.

On the other hand, in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, if the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1), it is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is at t3 earlier than the timing of t6. It is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) during which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the opening/closing pattern A1. The possibility of being sorted to the outside by the first sorting member 300 is higher than in the opening/closing pattern A1. However, since the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is short, the probability of winning the prize to the accessory device 150 is lower than in the opening/closing pattern A1. Considering the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 in the case of winning, the opening/closing pattern A1 is better in the operation pattern VA1 than the opening/closing pattern B1 (C1 ), the V prize rate is higher.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16), the opening/closing accessory 168 shifts from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, after that (after 1.0 sec), at timing t4, the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state. In this situation (RC2=11 to 16), the second allocating member 310 is not displaced, so that the second allocating member 310 does not distribute the wins to the V winning side.

In the situation of this operation pattern VA2, if the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing role 168 is A1, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state for the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening and closing role 168 is in the open state. The proportion of the period (1.0 sec) in which is greater than in the situation of the action pattern VA1, and the possibility of being sorted to the deviating side by the first distributing member 300 is higher than in the action pattern VA1. .

On the other hand, if the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B2 (RC2=11 to 13) in the operation pattern VA2, the open state is shifted to the open state at the timing t1, and the open state is changed from the timing t3. is maintained until timing t4 (after 1.0 sec) which is later. In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) during which the first distributing member 300 is in the distributing state to the period (1.0 sec) in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the opening/closing pattern B1. The possibility of being sorted to the deviating side by the first sorting member 300 is higher than in the open/close pattern B1. However, since the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is longer than in the opening/closing pattern B1, the probability of winning the accessory device 150 is higher than in the opening/closing pattern B1. Considering the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 in the case of winning, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the opening/closing pattern B2 is better than the opening/closing pattern B1 (C1 ), the V prize rate is higher.

In addition, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, if the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1) (RC2=14 to 16), the opening state is changed to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed to the above t3. (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) during which the first distributing member 300 is in the distributing state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the opening/closing pattern B1, Compared to the case of B2, the possibility of being distributed to the deviating side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening/closing patterns B1 and B2 in the operation pattern VA1. Also, since the period during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is shorter than in the opening/closing pattern B2, the winning probability of the accessory device 150 is lower than in the opening/closing pattern B2. Furthermore, in the case of this operation pattern VA2, the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing accessory 168 and the period in which the opening and closing state is maintained are the same as in the case of VA1, but in the case of VA2, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened from the open state. Even after switching to the closed state, there is a period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distributed state. Even if there is, there is a possibility that the first sorting member 300 will sort it out to the outside after that. Therefore, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the V winning probability is lower in the opening/closing pattern B1 than in the opening/closing pattern B2.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA3 (RC2=17 to 19), the first distribution member 300 does not operate, so there is no possibility that the first distribution member 300 distributes to the outside side. . On the other hand, during this period, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 switches from VB1 to VB2, and there is a possibility that the second distribution member 310 distributes to the V winning side. Specifically, in the operation pattern VB2, at the timing t4, which is 1.0 sec after the timing t1 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state, the second distribution member 310 changes from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. is displaced to Then, the distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec thereafter, and the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

If the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is A2 (C2) in the situation of the operation patterns VA3 and VB2, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed to the timing of t4. (after 1.0 sec). In this case, if it is a game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 just before the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed, there is a possibility that it will be distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 after that.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B3 in the situation of the operation patterns VA3 and VB2, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed to the timing of t3 ( 0.2 sec later). In this case, even if a game ball enters the accessory device 150, the interval between the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is is large, there is a low possibility that the second sorting member 310 sorts to the V winning side in this pattern.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the opening/closing accessory 168 provided in the accessory device 150 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, a game ball can enter the accessory device 150, and the V winning sensor in the accessory device 150 is activated. In the configuration in which the round of the opening/closing execution mode is continued by being detected by 192, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is made different in each round. As a result, the continuation rate (V winning rate) of each round can be changed without changing the operation timing of each role product (distribution members 300, 310, rotating body 201, etc.) provided in the role product device 150. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to improve interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In each round game of the opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, rounds (opening/closing patterns B and C) having a lower V winning probability than other rounds (opening/closing pattern A) are provided. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not to continue to the next round, especially in this round, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention.

The round following the round of the opening/closing pattern with the low V winning probability is the round of the opening/closing pattern with the higher V winning probability. As a result, if the round with the low V winning probability is passed, the round with the low V winning probability can be more likely to be continued, and the degree of attention to the round with the low V winning probability can be further increased.

In the opening/closing pattern of each round, the V prize probability is varied according to the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened/closed. As a result, in one round game, it is possible to perform a game such as the number of times of opening and closing to win a V prize, or whether it is easy to win a V prize, and the interest can be improved.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing accessory 168 during the normal game state is varied to vary the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 . Differences from the first embodiment will be described below.

In this embodiment, the winning/failure determination based on winning the first operation opening 38 and the winning/failure determination based on winning the second operation opening 39 are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, the result table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 stores the result table for the first working opening (FIG. 30(a)) and the result table for the second working opening. A result table (FIG. 30(b)) is stored. The result table for the first working port is the same as the result table in the first embodiment, so the description is omitted.

In the result table for the second opening, a special opening A result and a special opening B result are set as game results in addition to a missing result, a direct hit result, and a normal opening result. For the special open A result and the special open B result, the number of opening times is the same as the normal opening result (2 times), and the first opening timing is the same as the normal opening result (according to the opening type counter CS). , the length of the period for maintaining the first open state, the length of the period for maintaining the closed state, and the length of the period for maintaining the second open state are set to be different.

Specifically, in the case of the normal open result, the period during which the open state continues is uniformly 2.0 sec, and the waiting period during which the closed state is maintained between the first and second open times is also uniformly 1.0 sec. On the other hand, in the case of the special open A result, the period in which the open state is maintained for the first time is period TC1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the open state is maintained for the second time is period TC3 ( 0.7 sec), and the waiting period between the first and second open states is a period TC2 (1.2 sec). In the case of the special open B result, the period in which the open state is maintained for the first time is period TD1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the open state is maintained for the second time is period TD3 (0.3 sec). ), and the waiting period between the first and second open states is a period TD2 (1.5 sec).

The period during which the first open state is maintained and the period during which the second open state is maintained are set in step S902 in the above-described in-control process (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S902, the game result that triggered the opening of this time is referred to, and based on the result, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the opening period of this time to the opening period counter is executed. Also, the standby period between the first and second open states is set in step S909 in the above-described control-in-process (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S909, the game result that triggered the opening this time is referenced, and based on the result, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the current waiting period into the waiting period counter is executed.

In this embodiment, the relationship between the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each distribution member 300, 310 during the normal game state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 31(a) shows the relationship between the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each distribution member 300, 310 in the case of the normal opening result, and FIG. 31(b) shows the special opening A result. And the relationship between the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each distribution member 300, 310 in the case of the special opening B result.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when a prize is awarded to the operation ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t1, after a period corresponding to the value of the opening type counter CS (step S802), the opening/closing accessory is opened at the timing of t2. 168 is displaced to the open state. This open state is maintained for 2.0 sec, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t9. If the winning that occurs at the timing of t1 is the winning of the second operation port 39, and the result of two normal openings, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened at the timing of t10, which is the timing after 1.0 sec from the timing of t9. Displace to the open state. This open state is also maintained for 2.0 sec, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t14.

The operation of each distribution member 300, 310 will be described. This is performed in the second distribution setting processing in step S804, the first distribution control processing in step S1002, and the second distribution control processing in step S1004 in the processing for distribution (FIG. 21).

The first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t2 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state (after the first period has passed since the opening state), and 1.5 sec. This distribution state is maintained over the (second period). Then, at the timing of t5, the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state. If the opening this time is the result of opening twice, the non-distribution state is maintained for 1.0 sec (fifth period) from the timing of t5, and the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 after that is t10. At the timing (after the first period has passed since the opening state), the state is changed to the distribution state again. This distribution state is also maintained for 1.5 sec (second period), and is changed to the non-distribution state at the timing of t11.

The second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing t7 after 1.8 sec (third period) has elapsed from the timing t2 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. . This distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and changes to the non-distribution state at the timing of t8. If the opening this time is the result of opening twice, 0.6 sec (sixth period) from the timing t8 to the timing t10, and after the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened at the timing t10 The non-distribution state is maintained for 1.8 sec (third period). Then, at timing t12, the non-distribution state is changed to the distribution state, this state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and the state is changed to the non-distribution state at time t13.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, when the winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs at the timing of t1, the value of the opening type counter CS After a period corresponding to (step S802), the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2. This operation is the same as in the case of the normal open result.

When the game result is the special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (time period TC1) from timing t2, and is displaced to the closed state at timing t3. Then, at timing t4, which is 1.2 sec (time period TC2) after timing t3, the state changes from the closed state to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.7 sec (time period TC3), and at the timing of t9, the open state is changed to the closed state, and the second opening is completed.

When the game result is the special opening B result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (time period TD1) from timing t2, and is displaced to the closed state at timing t3. Then, at timing t6, which is 1.5 sec (time period TD2) after timing t3, the state changes from the closed state to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.3 sec (period TD3), and at timing t8, the open state is changed to the closed state, and the second opening is completed.

Here, even if the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 are the same. Therefore, the ratio of the period in which each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is in the distribution state/non-distribution state to one open period in the opening/closing accessory 168 is the normal opening result, the special opening A result, and the special opening B result. are different.

Specifically, in the normal open result, in one open state (for example, t2 to t9, t10 to t14), the ratio of the first distributing member 300 in the distributing state is 15/20, and the second distributing member 300 is in the distributed state. The rate at which the dividing member 310 is in the distributed state is 1/20.

On the other hand, in the case of the special opening A result, in the second opening state (t4 to t9), the ratio of the first distributing member 300 being in the distributing state is 2/7, which is 2/7 of the normal opening result. lower than the case. Also, the ratio of the second distribution member 310 being in the distributed state is 1/7, which is higher than in the case of the normal open result.

In the case of the special opening B result, the proportion of the first distributing member 300 in the distributing state in the second opening state (t6 to t8) is 0/3, which is lower than in the case of the normal opening result. Also, the proportion of the second distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/3, which is higher than in the case of the normal open result.

As already explained, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, distribution to the out side can occur, and when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, distribution to the V winning side can occur. can occur. Therefore, as described above, if the probability of being distributed by the first distribution member 300 is lower than that of the normal opening result, such as the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the probability of occurrence of the V prize increases. Further, when the probability of being distributed by the second distribution member 310 is higher than the normal open result, the probability of occurrence of the V winning prize is higher.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by varying the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 during the normal game state, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the probability of the V prize occurring when the prize is won in the accessory device 150 .

In addition, by setting the number of opening times (2 times) of the normal opening result based on the winning of the second operation opening 39 to the same number of times (2 times) of the special opening A result and the special opening B result, Since there is no need to increase the number of opening/closing patterns, the storage capacity can be reduced.

The timing at which the opening/closing accessory 168 starts to open based on the winning of the second operation port 39 is the same timing as other normal opening results (opening type counter timing based on the value of CS). As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of shooting a game ball in accordance with the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, that is, performing a so-called stop shot.

The special opening A result or the special opening B result may be notified by the symbol display device 51 or the like at a timing prior to the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 . By doing so, for example, the relationship between the rotational position of the rotating body 201 and the period required to reach the lead-out portion 186, and the relationship with the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 make it easier to win a V prize. Compared with the configuration in which the difficulty of winning is notified after the prize is won to the accessory device 150, the ease and difficulty of winning the V prize is determined at a timing prior to the winning of the accessory device 150. can be done with By doing so, it is possible to make the player more interested in the action (flowing mode) of the game ball.

In this embodiment, the relationship between the normal opening result and each special opening result has been described to determine the level of the V winning rate. Therefore, in the modified example shown in FIG. 32, the V winning rate will be explained in relation to each special opening result and the distribution members 300 and 310 (especially the second distribution member 310).

In this modification, a special opening A result, a special opening B result, and a special opening C result are set as special opening results. Each of the special opening A to C results is the result of two opening operations, similar to the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the above embodiment. As each special opening A to C result, it may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning of the first operation opening 38, or with a predetermined probability based on the winning of the second operation opening 39 It may be distributed.

In the special opening A result in the modified example shown in FIG. After the time corresponding to , the first opening operation is performed at the timing of ta2 (the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state).

In addition, in this modification, the second distribution member 310 as a distribution member that changes the V winning rate distributes after a predetermined period of 1.4 seconds (timing ta7) from the timing t2. state, and that state is maintained for 0.4 sec (displaced to non-allocation state at timing ta9).

In the first opening operation of the special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TE1) from the timing of ta2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of ta3 (opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state). Then, at the timing ta7 which is 1.2 sec (period TE2) after the timing ta3, the second opening operation is started (the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state). After that, at the timing of ta9 which is 0.4 sec (period TE3) after the timing of ta7, the second opening operation is completed (the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state).

In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification, as in the special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TF1) from timing ta2, and the opening state is maintained at timing ta3. The opening operation for the first time ends. Then, the second opening operation is started at timing ta6, which is 0.8 sec (period TF2) different from (shorter) than period TE2 from timing ta3. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing ta8, which is 0.5 sec (period TF3) after the timing ta6.

In the first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 seconds (period TG1) from the timing of ta2, similar to the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and The first opening operation ends at the timing of . Then, the second opening operation is started at timing ta4, which is 0.5 sec (period TG2) different (shorter) than the period TE2 or period TF2 from timing ta3. After that, at the timing ta5 which is 0.2 sec (period TG3) after the timing ta4, the second opening operation is completed.

In these cases, the special opening A result overlaps with the situation in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state from the timing ta7 when the open state is maintained in the second opening operation to the timing ta9. In this situation, if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, it is almost distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310. FIG.

In the special opening B result, in the second opening operation, the period during which the open state is maintained is longer than in the special opening A result (period TE3<period TF3), while the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is the period from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta8. Shorten. As a result, even if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, it is not distributed to the V winning side as in the above-mentioned special opening A result, but is distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 depending on the winning timing. It depends on whether or not you get it. More specifically, if a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs during the final period of the second opening operation, it is distributed to the V winning side, and other than that, it is not distributed to the V winning side.

In the special opening C result, in the second opening operation, the period during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state do not overlap. As a result, even if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 in the second opening operation, the second distribution member 310 does not distribute the prize to the V winning side.

As described above, by setting the opening operation timing of each special opening A to C result, the probability of occurrence of V winning can be varied.

In the modification shown in FIG. 32(b), the second distributing member 310 is kept the same as the modification shown in FIG. The opening/closing timing is set so that the probability of allocating to the V winning side is different depending on.

That is, as in the case of FIG. 32(a), the second distribution member 310 is opened at timing tb8, which is timing 1.4 seconds after predetermined timing tb2, which is the first opening timing. Displaced to the distribution state. Then, at the timing of tb10, which is 0.4 sec later, it is displaced to the non-distribution state.

In the first opening operation of the special opening A result in this modification, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TH1) from timing tb2, and the first opening operation ends at timing tb3. Then, at timing tb8, which is 1.2 sec (period TH2) after timing tb3, the second opening operation is started. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TH3) after the timing tb8.

In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification, as in the special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TI1) from timing tb2, and the opening state is maintained at timing tb3. The opening operation for the first time ends. Then, at timing tb7, which is 0.9 sec (period TI2) different from (shorter) than the period TH2 from timing tb3, the second opening operation is started. After that, at the timing of tb9, which is 0.4 sec (period TI3) after the timing of tb7, the second opening operation ends.

The first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification differs from the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and differs (longer) from the timing of tb2 than the period TH1 or the period TI1 by 0.4 sec (period TJ1 ), and the first opening operation ends at the timing tb4. Then, the second opening operation is started at timing tb5, which is 0.3 sec (period TJ2) different (shorter) than the period TH2 or period TI2 from timing tb4. After that, at timing tb6, which is 0.2 sec (period TJ3) after timing tb5, the second opening operation ends.

In these cases, the total period during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state in the special opening A result is TH1+TH3 (0.6 sec), and in the case of the special opening B result, it is TI1+TI3 (0.6 sec). In the case of the open C result, it is TJ1+TJ3 (0.6 sec), and in any of the special open A to C results, the total period of the open state is the same length.

As described above, even if the opening/closing timings of the results of special opening A to C are set so that the total period of the open state is the same, the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The overlap between the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is in the order of special opening A result>special opening B result>special opening C result. This makes it possible to vary the V winning rate in relation to the operation timing of the second allocating member 310 without varying the winning rate to the accessory device 150 for each opening result.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the method of setting the opening/closing pattern for each round in the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the first and second embodiments. Therefore, setting processing for each round in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33(a). As already described, the setting process for each round is a process executed in step S1304 of the opening/closing process (FIG. 24) in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), and is activated when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened. It is a process that

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the setting process for each round in this embodiment is substantially the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 25 in the description of the first embodiment. The difference is that if it is determined in step S1402 that the continuation flag is not stored, in each of the above embodiments, processing for setting a predetermined round pattern is executed in steps S1403 and S1404. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1402, lottery processing for determining the round pattern by lottery is executed in step S1408. In this lottery process, lottery counters for round patterns are acquired from various counter areas 114 d of RAM 114 , and lottery tables for round patterns are acquired from various table storage areas 113 d of ROM 113 . The lottery counter for the round pattern is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is updated at predetermined intervals, and can acquire random numerical information.

The round pattern lottery table can determine the current round pattern according to the value of the round pattern lottery counter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(b), for example, the lottery table is set so that the current round pattern differs from the previous round pattern. That is, according to the previous round pattern, the selection rate of pattern A, which is the easiest to continue the round as the current round pattern, differs. In other cases, pattern B and pattern C, which make it difficult to continue the round, are selected. 80%, 90% for pattern C). In the first round of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined pattern may be set, or a random pattern may be set by lottery or the like.

After performing the process of step S1408, the corresponding round pattern setting process is performed in step S1405, and then the processes of step S1406 and subsequent steps are performed.

By adopting a configuration in which the round pattern is determined by lottery or the like for each round as described above, the opening pattern of each round becomes more diverse in the open/close execution mode, and the game can be diversified. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the round following the round of the pattern (patterns B and C) in which it is difficult to continue the round, the round of the pattern (pattern A) in which it is easy to continue the round is set to be easily selected. Even if it is a round that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player overcomes it, the next round will be advantageous to the player, so even the disadvantageous round can be absorbed in the game. On the other hand, the next round of the pattern that makes it easy to continue the round is set so that it is easy to select the round that makes it difficult to continue the round, so it is possible to make the game fair without significantly increasing the ball output rate. Become.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the round pattern for the next and subsequent rounds is set in accordance with the timing at which the V winning occurs as the condition for continuing the round is met.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing process in this embodiment, which is basically the same as the opening/closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above-described embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize occurs in step S1311 and it is determined in step S1312 that the mode is the continuous variation mode, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, step S1318 is performed. At S1329, a process of grasping the timing at which the V winning occurred, that is, the number of openings during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 separately without being affected by the update even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing during the round. is configured to

After the value of the second round counter RC2 is stored in step S1329, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to "0" in step S1318, and the processes after step S1319 are executed.

The setting process for each round in this embodiment is configured to execute the round pattern lottery process for each round, as shown in FIG. 33(a) in the third embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c), the round pattern lottery table (distribution table) in the present embodiment includes the previous round pattern, the second round counter RC2, The next round pattern is set differently depending on the value of . More specifically, if the previous round was a round of pattern A, which is easy to continue, in the next round, the second round counter RC2 will be higher than 1 to 16 as shown in FIG. In the case of 17 to 19, pattern A is more likely to be selected because it is easier to continue the round.

In other words, in the previous round, if the conditions for continuing the round were satisfied at the opening and closing times in the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19), opening and closing in the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and in the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) were better. The configuration is such that the player is more advantageous in the next round than when the conditions for continuing the round are satisfied at the number of times.

By doing so, even in a scene where the condition for continuing the round is not easily satisfied and the player may feel uneasy, continuing the round at the end of the game is advantageous, so that the uneasiness and the next step will be realized. The game can be made to enjoy the balance with the advantage of the round.

In particular, in the final stage of pattern A (RC2=17 to 19), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is likely to occur. However, the condition for continuing the round is likely to be satisfied at the end of the round, and the occurrence of an event that the opening/closing execution mode ends without the condition for continuing the round being satisfied is suppressed. For this reason, as described above, in a game where balance is enjoyed, it is considered that the player will be highly interested in the timing of the V winning so that the V winning occurs at the end of the round as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 35(a), when comparing the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (11 to 16) in pattern A, the first half is more likely to continue the round in the next round than the second half. Pattern A, which is easy to play, is set to be easily selected, and the first half is set to be more advantageous in the next round than the second half.

In each of the above-described embodiments, including this embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode, if the conditions for continuing the round are satisfied, the next prize will be awarded even if the upper limit number of prizes for one round (9) has not been reached. Since it is configured to shift to a round, it is considered that the player will be interested in winning the V prize at the number of prizes that is as close to the upper limit as possible. Then, for example, if the player wins a V prize at a stage when the number of winning prizes is small, the player may feel that he/she has lost the round due to the relationship with the upper limit number of winning prizes. Therefore, as mentioned above, if you win a V in the first half of the round where the number of wins is relatively small, it will be better than if you win a V in the latter half of the round where the number of wins is larger than that in the next round. If the configuration is such that the round is advantageous to the player, even if the player feels that the player has lost the round as described above, it will be configured to secure it, and the player will be dissatisfied. It can be resolved.

In the lottery (distribution) table for pattern B shown in FIG. 35(b) and the lottery (distribution) table for pattern C shown in FIG. When a V winning occurs, pattern A, which facilitates round continuation in the next round, is likely to be selected. More specifically, as already explained, in Pattern B, the open/close pattern is set so that a V win can occur in the latter half of the round (RC2=11 to 16), and if a V win occurs at that timing , the next round tends to be pattern A, which is advantageous for the player. Also, in pattern C, the opening/closing pattern is set so that a V win can occur at the end of the round (RC2=17 to 19). It is easy to become an A round. On the other hand, in the pattern B, in the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the final stage (RC2=17 to 19) of the round, it is difficult to win the prize for the accessory device 150 in the first place. Similarly, in the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (RC2=11 to 16) of the round in pattern C, it is difficult for the character device 150 to win a prize. Therefore, by adopting the configuration as described above, it is possible to concentrate the points that the player pays attention to, and to add the intonation of the game.

Note that the lottery table for each pattern is merely an example, and other configurations may be used. For example, if a V win occurs at a timing in which it is difficult to win a prize in pattern B or pattern C, if the setting is made to be advantageous to the player (pattern A is likely to be selected), the winning to the accessory device 150 will occur. Even in a situation where it is difficult to generate a game ball, it is possible to create a meaning of trying to generate a prize to the accessory device 150, and it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping action of stopping the shooting of the game ball. .

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variation of the open pattern is different from that of the fourth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, pattern D and pattern E are set as open patterns in this embodiment in addition to or in place of patterns A to C. FIG.

In the pattern D, in the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (RC2=11 to 16) of the round, winning to the role device 150 can occur, and there is a good possibility of winning the V prize. However, compared to pattern A, the winning rate for the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are set low.

At the end of the round in pattern D (RC2=17 to 19), the period of maintaining the open state is set longer than in pattern A, and the winning rate for accessory device 150 and the winning rate in V are similar to pattern A. Pattern D is set higher than . Therefore, at the end of the round, Pattern D is more likely to be met than Pattern A to continue the round. condition can be established. Therefore, in pattern D, the conditions for round continuation are likely to be established near the upper limit of winning prizes, and in the open/close execution mode of the continuous variation mode, the pattern is more advantageous for the player than pattern A.

In pattern E, the period during which the open state is maintained is set longer than in pattern A in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10). Therefore, the winning rate for the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are higher than in pattern A, and the conditions for continuing the round are likely to be met during this period. On the other hand, in the latter half of the round (RC2=10 to 16), the opening/closing timing is set so that it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize, and the pattern B1 in the pattern B and the pattern C1 in the pattern C are set. It has become.

At the end of the round (RC2=17 to 19) in pattern E, the open state maintenance period is set longer than the game ball firing cycle, and there is a good possibility of winning the accessory device 150. Furthermore, if a game ball enters the accessory device 150 during the period in which the open state is maintained, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can occur.

As shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(e), the round pattern lottery table (distribution table) in the present embodiment is based on the values of the previous round pattern and the second round counter RC2. The next round pattern is set differently.

The difference from the above-described fourth embodiment is that in the lottery (sorting) table of each pattern A to C, an example of sorting to pattern D and pattern E is added, and pattern D and pattern E are added. The difference is that a lottery (distribution) table is set. Here, the features of the lottery tables of pattern D and pattern E will be described in detail.

In the pattern D lottery table, if the round continuation conditions are satisfied in the first half and the second half of the round (RC = 1 to 16), the patterns A, D, and E that make it easy to continue the round are difficult to select, and the patterns that make it difficult to continue the round. B and C are more likely to be selected. On the other hand, when the round continuation condition is met at the end of the round (RC=17 to 19), pattern A, which facilitates round continuation, is likely to be selected. As described above, in the first half and the second half of the round, it is possible to win a prize for the accessory device 150. However, since the continuation condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied than in pattern A, in the first half and the second half of the round, the prize cannot be won. occurs, but the continuation condition is unlikely to be established (V winning is unlikely to occur). At the end of the round in pattern D, the winning rate of the accessory device 150 and the winning rate of V are increased, so the continuation condition is likely to be established. Therefore, in the pattern D, in the first half and the second half of the round, the game is allowed to win a prize up to the maximum number of prizes in the round, and then, in the final stage, a prize is awarded so as to reach the maximum number of prizes awarded, or a V prize is awarded. can be controlled to some extent. Therefore, the active participation of the player in the game can be expected.

In the pattern E lottery table, if a V win occurs in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10) in which the winning of the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, the patterns B and C that make it difficult to continue the round are likely to be selected, and the round continues. Patterns A, D, and E, which are easy to remove, are less likely to be selected. On the other hand, when a V win occurs at the end of the round (RC2=17 to 19) where similar prizes to the accessory device 150 tend to occur, pattern A, which facilitates the continuation of the round, is likely to be selected. Therefore, even if the number of times of opening and closing the accessory device 150 is likely to generate a prize, the selection of whether to win in the first half or in the final stage is made in relation to the continuation rate of the next round. Players can be encouraged to actively participate in games.

Furthermore, in the lottery table of pattern E, if a V win occurs in the latter half of the round (RC2=11 to 16) in which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize, pattern A or pattern E, which facilitates the continuation of the round, is likely to be selected. ing. In this respect and in relation to the selection rate when V winning occurs in the final stage, depending on the number of rounds, it may be advantageous for the player to aim at winning the accessory device 150 from the second half. Therefore, even in a situation in which it is difficult to win a prize to the accessory device 150, it is possible to make it meaningful to shoot the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping action.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 executes a special notification at a predetermined timing during the opening/closing execution mode. First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 38, the effect processing executed by the MPU 142 of the effect control device 82 will be described. The effect process is a process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect processing, processing for executing various effects is performed based on commands from the main control device 81 . Incidentally, the RAM 144 of the effect control device 82 is provided with a received command storage area capable of storing commands received from the main control device 81 . The area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can read out from the previously stored command.

Now, in the effect processing, first, at step SB101, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received. As already explained, the opening command is a command output from the main controller 81 at each opening in each round in the opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined in step SB101 that an open command has been received, an open handling process is executed in step SB102. This process, which will be described in detail later, is a process for executing a special notification at a predetermined timing during the opening/closing execution mode.

If a negative determination is made in step SB101, or if the process of step SB102 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB103. At step SB103, it is determined whether or not a normal open command has been received. As already explained, the normal opening command generates a prize to the operation ports 38 and 39 during the normal game state, and the opening operation of the opening and closing accessory 168 occurs like a direct hit result or a missing result based on the lottery result. This command is output from the main controller 81 in cases other than the case of no opening (in the case of a normal opening result or a special opening result). When it is determined in step SB103 that the normal opening command has been received, normal opening handling processing is executed in step SB104. Incidentally, this normal opening command includes information such as the content of the lottery results set by the main control device 81, the number of opening times, and the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168. In this normal opening corresponding process, based on the information of the received command, the number of times of opening is notified to notify the number of openings when the operation openings 38 and 39 are won, and the opening notification is performed as an effect when the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened. Execute the processing for performing the production.

If a negative determination is made in step SB103, or if the process of step SB104 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB105. In step SB105, as other processing, other commands received from the main control device 81 (a shift command including information on winning a prize during a normal game state and a shift of hold information, an out command indicating a game result, a direct hit command, etc.) Also, various commands such as a control end command, a prize winning command within the role product, an opening command, a closing command, and an ending command relating to the control of the opening/closing execution mode output when controlling the role product device 150). A display content command is output to the display control device 100 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the pattern display device 51, and a process for controlling the display of the pattern display device 51 is executed. In addition, in step SB105, for example, if the operation means for production (production button, etc.) is connected to the production control device 82, production for responding to the operation (production for operating the production button) is executed. . Also, in step SB105, control for effecting demonstration screens, and other control for various effects are executed. Then, after executing the processing of step SB105, the processing for this effect ends.

Next, the contents of the special notification during the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern in the opening/closing execution mode that is added or changed in this embodiment, and FIG. 39(b) is a flow chart showing the opening correspondence processing. (c) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of various special effects performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 as a special notification.

First, as shown in FIG. 39(a), in the present embodiment, pattern C and pattern F are set as opening patterns in the opening/closing execution mode, in which the opening/closing timing differs according to the value of the number of times of opening (RC2). . As already explained, in pattern C, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened and closed at the opening and closing timing at which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win in both the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (RC2=11 to 16) of the round. works. Then, at the end of the round (RC2=17 to 19), the opening/closing accessory 168 operates at such a timing that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can occur.

In pattern F, in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10), similarly to pattern C, the opening/closing accessory 168 operates at an opening/closing timing at which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize. The operation timing is the same timing as the pattern C. Therefore, in the first half of the round, it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish whether the round pattern of pattern C or the round pattern of pattern F is selected.

In pattern F, in the latter half of the round (RC2=11 to 16), unlike pattern C, the opening/closing accessory 168 operates at an opening/closing timing at which winning of the accessory device 150 is likely to occur. In other words, in the second half of the round, unlike pattern C, a prize to the role device 150 can occur, and a V prize can also occur as a condition for continuing the round.

In pattern F, at the end of the round (RC2=17 to 19), similar to pattern C, V distribution may occur, but the period in which the open/close accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is the pattern. It is longer than in the case of C, and the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are also higher than in the pattern C.

As described above, when pattern C and pattern F are compared, in the first half of the round, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing accessory 168 is the same opening and closing pattern. It is difficult to identify which pattern C or F is the round. On the other hand, pattern F is overwhelmingly more advantageous to the player than pattern C in the latter half and final stage of the round.

Therefore, such a change in situation is configured to be notified on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 . As a process for that purpose, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the opening corresponding process corresponding to the opening command output from the main controller 81 during the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Incidentally, the opening command output from the main controller 81 includes information on the type of opening/closing execution mode (16R continuous mode or continuous variation mode). Information on whether the release is a release command at the start of the round or a release command corresponding to each release count during the round, numerical information on the first round counter RC1 and numerical information on the second round counter RC2, etc. shall be included. , These information can also be grasped by the production control device 82 side.

In the opening handling process, first, at step SB201, a process for determining whether or not the current opening pattern is pattern C or pattern F is executed. If the pattern is not pattern C or pattern F, the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. In the case of pattern C or pattern F, it is determined at step SB202 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "11". As already explained, when the second round counter RC2 is 1 to 10, the opening/closing member operates in the same opening/closing pattern as pattern C and pattern F, and after the second round counter RC2 reaches "11", the pattern A difference in opening/closing pattern between pattern C and pattern F occurs. Therefore, if the second round counter RC2 is not "11" at step SB202, this handling process is terminated, and if it is "11", the process proceeds to step SB203.

At step SB203, it is determined whether pattern C is present. If it is pattern F instead of pattern C, the process proceeds to step SB204, and after controlling the display control device 100 to execute the special effect A on the pattern display device 51, the corresponding processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be pattern C in step SB203, the process proceeds to step SB205, and after controlling the display control device 100 to execute the special effect B in the pattern display device 51, this corresponding processing is executed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 39(c), in the special effect A, for example, the display screen G displays "Lucky! Continuous chance!" is displayed. In the special effect B, the display screen G displays, for example, "... ... (unfortunately)" is displayed. In the case of this embodiment, even in pattern C, there is a possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed at the end of the round (RC2=17 to 19). In order to inform the existence of an advantageous situation, the above special effect B displays "...don't give up until the end!".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing accessory 168 is the same until the middle of the round, and the opening and closing pattern (pattern F) that is advantageous to the player from a predetermined timing and the opening and closing pattern that is more disadvantageous than that. , and the pattern display device 51 informs which pattern it is at the predetermined timing. By doing so, even in a situation where it is difficult to identify the pattern of the round until the predetermined timing, it is possible to draw attention to the special notification at the predetermined timing.

In particular, until a predetermined timing, the player is in a disadvantageous situation (a situation in which it is difficult for the player to win a prize in the accessory device 150). It is thought that the player will be highly interested in whether the change will occur.

In the above-described embodiment, in the open/close execution mode of the continuous variation mode, if the selection rate between pattern C and pattern F is set so that pattern F is more likely to be selected than pattern C, the player will normally be in a disadvantageous situation. , the sense of surprise when special notification A is performed (when pattern F is selected) can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel the benefits of the special notification A.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing during the normal game state. As the special notification during the normal game state, a first special notification and a second special notification suggesting adjustment of the shooting timing of the game ball are set. The details of each of these special notifications will be described later, but by performing each special notification, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the rate of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 , and is set to increase.

As a condition for executing these special notifications, in this embodiment, for example, according to the round continuation timing during the opening and closing execution mode, a configuration is made in which a transition is made between a mode in which special notifications that are advantageous to the player are easy to execute and a mode in which it is not. and These modes will be described in detail later, but first, the process for grasping the round continuation timing related to the mode transition will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing opening/closing processing in this embodiment.

The opening/closing process in this embodiment is basically the same as the opening/closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the embodiments described above. The difference is that when a V prize occurs in step S1311 and it is determined in step S1312 that the mode is the continuous variation mode, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, step S1318 is performed. At S1329, a process of grasping the timing at which the V winning occurred, that is, the number of openings during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 separately without being affected by the update even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing during the round. is configured to This is as described in the fourth embodiment above.

After executing the process of step S1329, the process of adding the value of the second round counter RC2 grasped in step S1329 to the value of the total round counter TRC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in step S1330. to run. The total round counter TRC is a counter for storing the integrated value of the timing (the value of RC2) at which the round continuation condition is established in the opening/closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode.

After executing the processing of step S1330, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to "0" in step S1318, and the processing from step S1319 is executed.

Further, in the opening/closing process in this embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, that is, at the ending, the value of the total round counter TRC in the current opening/closing execution mode is output to the effect control device 82 side. That is, after the ending start process is executed in step S1327, the process of reading the value of the total round counter TRC from the various counter areas 114d is executed in step S1331. Sets the value of the round counter TRC.

As already explained, the ending command is output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed in other processing (step SB105) of the processing for effect (FIG. 38). Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the other processing, based on the reception of the ending command, the special notification of the pattern display device 51 is executed according to the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command. Perform processing to switch display modes with different ratios.

A normal mode, a relief mode, and a special mode are set as display modes. As shown in FIG. 41(b), the relief mode has the highest execution rate of the special notification when the special opening result is obtained based on, for example, winning the second operation opening 39 during the normal game state. , the relief mode, the special mode, and the normal mode are set so that the execution rate of the special notification increases in this order. In this case, in the effect control device 82 which received the ending command, if the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command is 1 to 50, it sets to relief mode, and if it is 51 to 150, it sets to normal mode. If the value is 151 to 285, the special mode is set.

That is, in the open/close execution mode, if the timing of occurrence of the V winning is early as the conditions for continuing the round are met, the relief mode is likely to be set, and if it is late, the special mode is likely to be set. If the timing of occurrence of the V prize is early, there is a high possibility that the maximum number of prizes won has not been reached. Also, if the value of the total round counter TRC is small, there is a high possibility that the open/close execution mode ended in a short number of rounds. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode is set to a rescue mode in which the special notification is more likely to be executed than usual. In this way, it is possible to help the player who did not get many benefits in the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, as described above, if a V win occurs in the latter half (RC2=11-16) or the final stage (RC2=17-19) of each round and the round continuation condition is met, the player is treated favorably (next round). The pattern of the round is likely to be set to a pattern with a high continuation rate), and the player tries to operate so as to generate the V prize in the latter half or the end of the round as much as possible. As a result, the value of the total round counter TRC may also increase, so the display mode is set to a special mode in which the special notification is more likely to be executed than usual, depending on the player's effort. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate more active participation of the player in the game.

In addition, since the special mode is only for expecting active participation of the player, the execution rate of the special notification is lower in the special mode than in the relief mode. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game without increasing the ball output rate too much.

How the special notification is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 41(a) and 41(c). Here, the explanation will be made based on the special opening A result explained in the modified example of the second embodiment and the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 .

As shown in FIG. 41(a), it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the operation ports 38 and 39 at timing t1 and the game result is the special opening A result. In this case, the first opening operation starts at timing t2 and ends at timing t3. Also, the second opening operation starts at the timing of t5 and ends at the timing of t6.

Here, the game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle (0.6 sec, Pa) from the game ball shooting mechanism 53 by operating the shooting handle 60 . For example, as a situation in which the operation of the shooting handle 60 is continued, the game ball is shot at the timing of P1, the next game ball is shot at the timing of P2, which is after Pa, and the next game ball is shot at P3, which is after that Pa. It is assumed that the game ball is shot at the timing of , and the game ball is shot at the timing of P4, which is after Pa.

First, the case where the special notification is not performed will be described. In relation to the firing cycle Pa, for example, the game ball fired at timing P1 wins the accessory device 150 in the first opening operation of the special opening A result. (timing t2). In that case, it is assumed that the game ball reaches the second distribution member 310 at the timing t4, which is after the period required for the game ball that has won inside the accessory device 150 to reach the second distribution member 310 . Then, at this timing, the second distribution member 310 is not in the distribution state, and V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

Also, for example, it is assumed that the game ball launched at the timing of P4 reaches the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening operation (timing of t6). In this case, although the second distribution member 310 is reached at the timing t7, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed because the distribution state has already been displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state.

Next, a case where a special notification is made will be described. When the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 occurs at the timing of t8, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 displays, for example, "Wait a minute!" as the first special notification. Based on this display, the player stops shooting game balls. When the game result based on the winning at the timing t8 is the special opening A result, the first opening operation is started at the timing t9 and ends at the timing t10. Then, the second opening operation starts at the timing of t12 and ends at the timing of t14.

In this case, when the game ball is launched at the timing P5, which is the timing before the start of the second opening operation, the game ball enters the accessory device 150 at the timing t12, and the winning game ball It reaches the second distribution member 310 at the timing of t13, and as a result, V distribution is performed and V winning can occur. In this case, at the timing of t11, which is the timing slightly (0.1 sec, period PC) before the timing of P5, as the second special notification, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 displays, for example, "Now, you can hit !!” is displayed. Based on this display, the player starts the shooting operation, and as a result, the game ball is shot at the timing of P5, and as described above, V winning can occur. As a player, the shooting operation of the game ball has been stopped for a period of Pb longer than the shooting cycle Pa.

As described above, as a special notification, by performing a special notification that instructs the shooting operation of the game ball in relation to the opening operation, it is possible to change the V winning rate, that is, the transition rate to the opening and closing execution mode. By realizing this on the production side without changing the operation timings of the opening/closing accessory 168, the distribution members 300 and 310, and the rotating body 201, the basic configuration of the game machine is not changed. It is possible to easily adjust the output of balls and change the specifications of the game machine.

By performing the first special notification as described above, the period during which the shooting of the game ball is stopped can be lengthened. Therefore, for example, in the period from the first special notification to the second special notification, instead of stopping the shooting of the game ball, calculate backward from the timing (timing of P5) at which the second special notification should be performed, and a little The timing of performing the second special notification may be adjusted so that the V prize can occur even if the shooting is stopped and the shooting of the game ball is continued thereafter.

In addition, in the open/close execution mode, in a situation (TRC=1 to 50) in which the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is likely to be small, the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to compensate for the fact that the benefits obtained by the person were small.

In the opening/closing execution mode, even in a situation (TRC=151 to 285) in which the number of winning prizes to the accessory device 150 is likely to be large, the state is shifted to a state advantageous to the player. It is possible to draw attention not only to the game of winning the game ball to the accessory device 150, but also to the timing of the winning (timing of occurrence of V winning), etc., and to further encourage the active participation of the player in the game. .

<Eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the operation start timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 are changed as follows. That is, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed to the prize winning timing to the operation openings 38 and 39 .

In this embodiment, the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is started based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the operation pattern is uniformly set. Specifically, the first distribution member 300 is distributed from the non-distribution state at the timing when the first period (1.5 sec in this embodiment) has passed from the timing when the winning to the first operation opening 38 has occurred. state, and when the second period (1.5 sec in this embodiment) elapses from that timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. In addition, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing when the third period (3.3 sec in this embodiment) has passed from the timing when the winning to the first operation opening 38 occurred. Then, when the fourth period (0.1 sec in this embodiment) elapses from that timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. In the case of the second operation port 39, the operation pattern is the same as the operation pattern at the time of winning the first operation port 38, and specifically, the first period and the second period (the third period and the fourth period) are the same, and after that (after the second period or the fourth period), the operation of the first period and the second period (the third period and the fourth period) again Pattern repeats. By doing so, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 is determined after determining the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 as in each of the above embodiments. .

On the other hand, if the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniformly set from the winning timings to the operation ports 38 and 39, for example, the second distribution member from the winning timings to the operation ports 38 and 39 There is a concern that a so-called stopping shot will be made to target the allocation to the V winning side by 310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while uniformly setting the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 from winning to the operation ports 38 and 39 as described above, opening and closing as described in the first embodiment is performed. By leaving a configuration in which the opening start timing of the accessory 168 is random, such a stopping act is suppressed. In addition, while randomizing the opening start timing in this way, it is also possible to intentionally change the V winning rate on the gaming machine side by adjusting the opening start timing. The configuration for that purpose will be described in detail below.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing opening/closing timing setting processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the opening/closing timing setting process is a process executed in step S802 of the control start process (step S506, FIG. 17) in the game control process (FIG. 16) of the normal process, and the operation port is opened during the normal game state. This is a process for setting the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 when a prize is won in 38, 39.

In this embodiment, first, in step S1601, a process of acquiring an opening timing table from the opening timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is executed. As the opening timing table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, a first opening timing table and a second opening timing table are set.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), the first opening timing table is similar to the opening timing table (FIG. 11(c)) in each of the above-described embodiments. The release standby time is set randomly (0.5 sec to 2.4 sec) according to the release type counter CS. On the other hand, the second opening timing table, as shown in FIG. The release standby time is set according to the relationship with the operation of 310 (V allocation). Then, the second opening timing table is more likely to generate a V prize than the first opening timing table. Although the details of the second opening timing table will be described later, similar to the first opening timing table, the opening standby time is set differently according to the opening type counter CS.

Which opening timing table is selected differs depending on, for example, the game state at the start of this process (when a prize is awarded to the operation ports 38 and 39). Specifically, the second opening timing table is selected or selected until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied after a predetermined opening/closing execution mode (for example, the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode) is completed. After the end condition is satisfied, the first opening timing is selected or tends to be selected. The end condition may be, for example, a configuration that is established when the number of winnings to the operation ports 38 and 39 or the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened (the number of operations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), or a predetermined number of times. (for example, an opening/closing execution mode that is a continuous variation mode).

After one of the opening timing tables is selected in step S1601, the opening type counter CS is obtained in step S1602, and the corresponding opening timing (opening standby time) is set in step S1603. After that, the opening/closing timing setting process is terminated.

Details of each opening timing table selected in step S1601 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 44 in addition to FIG.

First, the relationship between the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the opening standby time of the opening/closing accessory 168 will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, when the winning to the first operation port 38 occurs at the timing of t1, the first distribution member 300 is after the first period (1.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of t1 when the winning occurred. At timing t3, the non-distribution state is changed to the distribution state, and at timing t6 after the second period (after 1.5 seconds), the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state. In addition, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing t7, which is after the third period (3.3 seconds) has passed from the timing t1 when the prize was won. After the fourth period (after 0.1 sec) of t8, the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state.

An opening waiting time is determined based on the winning of the first operation opening 38, and for example, the opening waiting time is a first waiting time shorter than the first period until the displacement timing of the first allocating member 300 (for example, 0.00). 5 sec), the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 after the first waiting time has elapsed from the winning, and then for a predetermined period (2.0 sec, step S902). ), and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t5. In this case, the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state overlaps with the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state (off distribution period), and the length of the period is 1.0 sec. becomes. Moreover, there is no overlap with the period (V distribution period) during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state.

On the other hand, the opening standby time determined based on the winning of the first operation port 38 is changed to a second standby time (for example, 2.4 sec) longer than the first period until the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. When set, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4, which is after the second waiting time has passed since the prize winning, and is then opened for a predetermined period (2.0 sec). The state is maintained, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t10. In this case, in the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, although the separation distribution period from the first distribution member 300 overlaps, it is shorter than the first waiting time set, and the period has a length of 0.6 sec. Also, the V distribution period with the second distribution member 310 overlaps, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec.

Regarding the operation pattern of each distribution member 300, 310 when a prize is won in the second operation port 39, since it is a repetition of the case where a prize is won in the first operation port 38, a detailed description will be given. Although omitted, the first distribution member 300 is displaced to the non-distribution state at timing t6 and then displaced to the distribution state at timing t11 after the first period has elapsed. Then, at the timing of t14 after the second period has elapsed from the timing of t11, the state is changed to the non-distribution state again. The second distribution member 310 is displaced to the non-distribution state at timing t8 and then displaced to the distribution state at timing t15 after the third period has elapsed. Then, at the timing of t16 after the fourth period has elapsed from the timing of t15, the state is changed to the non-distribution state.

The opening standby time is determined based on the winning of the second operation opening 39. For example, if the opening standby time is the first standby time, the deviation distribution period and the V distribution period for the first opening are the same as those at the time of winning to the first actuation opening 38 . At the timing t5 when the first opening ends, a waiting time between the first opening and the second opening is set, and this time is a predetermined period (1.0 sec, see step S909). ing. Then, at the timing of t9 when the waiting time elapses, the open state is set for the second time, and the open state is maintained for a predetermined period (2.0 sec, see step S902). Then, at the timing of t13 when the period elapses, it is displaced to the closed state. Thus, when 0.5 sec is set as the first standby time, the deviation apportionment period at the time of the second opening is 1.1 sec, which is longer than the first time. In addition, even when it is opened for the second time, it does not overlap with the V allocation period.

If the opening standby time determined based on the winning of the second operation opening is the second standby time, the first operation for the deviation distribution period and V distribution period for the first opening It is the same as when winning a prize to the mouth 38 . At timing t10 when the first opening is completed, a waiting time between each opening is set (1.0 sec, see step S909), and at timing t12 when that period elapses, the state changes to the open state. Then, at the timing of t17 when the period for which this open state is maintained (see step S902 for 2.0 sec) has passed, the state is changed to the closed state. Thus, when 2.4 sec is set as the second standby time, the deviation apportionment period at the time of the second opening is 0.6 sec, which is the same length as the first time. Also, when the valve is opened for the second time, it overlaps with the V distribution period, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec, which is the same as the first time.

In this way, the lengths of the off-distribution period and the V-distribution period may differ depending on the set release standby time. In this embodiment, in the second opening timing table, the V winning rate is changed by using the overlapping relationship with the out-of-range apportionment period or the V apportionment period.

That is, when the opening standby time is set from 0.5 sec (first timing) to 1.0 sec (second timing), the period overlapping with the deviation distribution period gradually becomes longer (1.0 sec → 1.5 sec ). Therefore, the probability that the winning game ball 150 is distributed to the out side is higher when the waiting time for opening is set to 1.0 sec than when it is set to 0.5 sec. In other words, the V prize rate is lowered. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the opening type counter is set so that the probability that the waiting time for opening is set to 1.0 sec is lower than the probability that the waiting time for opening is set to 0.5 sec. CS values are assigned.

Further, when the opening standby time is set from 1.0 sec (second timing) to 1.3 sec (third timing), the length of the period overlapping with the deviation distribution period remains unchanged (the longest 1.3 sec.). 5 sec), and there is no overlap with the V allocation period. Therefore, the value of the release type counter CS is assigned such that the probability of being set in these waiting times for opening is lower than the probability of being set in other times.

If the release standby time is set after 1.4 sec (fourth timing) after 1.3 sec (third timing), overlap with the V apportionment period occurs. Therefore, although the length of the period that overlaps with the off-distribution period is the same as the length of the longest overlap, the release standby time is 1.4 sec as the period that overlaps with the V distribution period. From (fourth timing) to 1.5 sec (fifth timing), the value of the release type counter CS is higher than the probability set from 1.0 sec to 1.3 sec (second timing to third timing). is allocated.

When the open standby time is set from 1.5 sec (fifth timing) to 2.4 sec (sixth timing) after 1.4 sec (fourth timing), the period overlapping with the deviation distribution period gradually increases. (1.5 sec→0.6 sec). Also, if this period is set, any overlap with the V allocation period occurs, and the length remains unchanged at 0.1 sec. Therefore, the probability that the winning game ball 150 is distributed to the out side is lower when the waiting time for opening is set to 2.4 sec than when it is set to 1.5 sec. In other words, the V prize rate increases. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, the value of the opening type counter CS is assigned so that the probability that the waiting time for opening is set to 2.4 sec is higher than the probability that the waiting time for opening is set to 1.5 sec.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set to a constant operation from the timing when the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 occurs, and then the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 is performed. , to the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, it is possible to change the probability of winning a V prize in the accessory device 150. FIG.

In the present embodiment, in order to change the probability of winning the V prize, the operation pattern after the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is a uniform pattern. That is, although the V winning probability is changed as described above, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 does not require a large change, and only the waiting time before opening (opening waiting time) can be changed. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to vary the V winning rate with a simple configuration.

As for the opening timing table, although the first opening timing table and the second opening timing table are provided, other tables may be provided, or only the second opening timing table may be provided. In addition, in the second opening timing table, the opening waiting time with a high V winning rate is easily selected, but the opening waiting time with a low V winning rate may be easily selected.

A lottery or the like may be used to determine which opening timing table to select. In this case, the probability of winning the lottery (probability of selecting the second opening timing table) may be changed according to the game state.

The opening timing table selected according to the game state when the reservation information is consumed based on the winning to the operation ports 38, 39 is different, but the opening timing is selected according to the game state when the reservation information is acquired. It is good also as composition with which a table differs. For example, with respect to the pending information acquired during the opening/closing execution mode, if the second opening timing table is selected or easily selected, the advantage of acquiring the pending information during the opening/closing execution mode is It is possible to induce a series of mansions, and it is possible to improve interest. In particular, for example, if winning to the accessory device 150 does not occur easily during the opening/closing execution mode, the player is likely to feel dissatisfaction that it is difficult to obtain prize balls even in the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, if it is configured to advantageously handle the hold information acquired during the opening/closing execution mode as described above, even if it is difficult to win a prize to the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode, the spilled ball is expected to enter the operation openings 38 and 39, and as a result, it is possible to not only alleviate the dissatisfaction described above, but also to realize a new game property such that the opening/closing execution mode itself becomes easier to repeat.

Further, with respect to the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, two), if the second open timing table is selected or easily selected (handled advantageously), the hold information It is possible to generate the merit of acquiring a lot of In the first place, the easier it is to win a prize to the operation openings 38 and 39, the easier it is to win a prize to the accessory device 150, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode is more likely to occur. Furthermore, if it is configured such that the machine where the reservation information is easily accumulated is more advantageous as in the above-described structure, the machine where the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 is more likely to occur can be made to be the machine where the open/close execution mode is more likely to occur. It is possible to widen the range of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement. In addition, for example, the operation of the accessory device 150 is set long, or the length of the game cycle (variation display time) when the reservation information is consumed is set long. The longer the period from the digestion of information to the end of the operation of the accessory device 150 is set, the easier it is for the pending information to accumulate. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that a so-called stopping action of stopping the shooting of the game ball until the action of the accessory device 150 is completed is likely to be performed. Therefore, if a configuration is applied to such a configuration, as described above, it is possible to create significance in accumulating pending information, and to deter the above-mentioned stopping action. It becomes possible.

Conversely, for the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the second open timing table may be selected or easily selected (handled advantageously). . In this way, even if winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 does not occur easily, it can be relieved. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the action of repeatedly firing and stopping the game ball is likely to be performed so as to make it difficult to store the reservation information. Therefore, when adopting the above configuration, for example, when the shooting of game balls continues for a predetermined period or more, and when the number of pending information is less than a predetermined number, it is preferable to adopt a configuration for handling it advantageously.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of relieving the player (relief that the V prize does not easily occur), as a game state, the number of wins to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the end of one opening and closing execution mode (the number of games played) Depending on the configuration, the ease of selection of the second opening timing table changes, specifically, the number of wins (number of games) to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the end of one opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined number or more. Then, the second opening timing table may be selected or easily selected. In this way, it is possible to save a so-called "hooking board" in which the open/close execution mode does not easily occur, and it is possible to make it meaningful to continue the game even with such a hooking board.

From the viewpoint of relieving the player, the degree of advantage at the time of consuming pending information is changed according to the number of winnings (number of games played) to the operation ports 38 and 39 after one opening/closing execution mode ends as described above. For example, the advantage may be changed according to the occurrence rate of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time, or the advantage may be changed according to the type of the previous opening/closing execution mode (for example, compared to the 16R continuous mode). It may be configured to increase the advantage when it is in a disadvantageous continuous variation mode), or whether or not a V prize has occurred at the time of digestion of the hold information before this time (for example, the previous hold information) or the accessory device 150 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree of advantage is changed depending on whether or not a prize is won.

Also, as a configuration for changing the advantage (changing the V winning rate) when the reserved information is consumed, it may be configured to change the opening and closing waiting time as in the present embodiment, or as in the second embodiment. The advantage may be changed by making it easier/harder to select the special opening result.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the operation pattern of each distribution member 300, 310 is fixed from the timing of digestion of the pending information, while the pattern on the main display unit 43 fluctuates when the pending information is digested. Display is executed, and opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started after the end of the variable display. A configuration for that purpose will be described below.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing game control processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the game control process is a process executed in step S403 of the regular process (FIG. 15) which is started periodically.

In this embodiment, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the game control process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not it is in the accessory control state. If it is not in the role product control state, the process proceeds to step S1703. Note that the processing of steps S1701 and S1702 is the same as the processing of steps S501 and S502 described above.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main display unit 43 starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the pending information is subject to the validity determination, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the validity determination of the pending information is the Ending the variable display is regarded as one game cycle, and the configuration is such that the variable display of the game cycle is sequentially executed for each piece of reservation information. Then, in step S1703, when the counter corresponding to the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process (step S1706), which will be described later, has not reached a predetermined value (for example, "0"), Determine that it is running. In addition, at the start of execution of one game round, the flags corresponding to various flag storage areas 114e are stored, and at the end of one game round, the flags are erased. It may be configured to determine whether or not one game is being executed.

When one game is being executed, the game control process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to the opening/closing execution mode and the role control state, the process for controlling the role product is not executed during one game round.

If one game is not being executed, the process advances to step S1704 to determine whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". If it is "0", the game control process is terminated as it is. This process is the same as the process of step S503.

If it is determined in step S1704 that the common pending number CRN is not "0" and there is pending information (undigested) that is not subject to the validity determination, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, data setting processing is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S504, and executes a process for successively making the values of the various counters C1, C2, CS, etc. regarding undigested pending information subject to validity determination.

In the subsequent step S1706, a variable display time setting process is executed. In the variable display time setting process, the value of the current common number of reservations CRN and the value of the release type counter CS for the current reservation information are acquired, and these values are stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. By referring to the stored variable display time table, the variable display time of the current game cycle is specified, and the specified variable display time is displayed on the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Execute the process of entering information.

In the variable display time table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the variable display time for each game round is set differently according to the value of the common reservation number CRN. It is set such that the larger the value, that is, the larger the number of stored pending information, the shorter the variable display time. When the value of the common pending number CRN is the same, which variable display time is set is randomly set in increments of 0.1 sec according to the value of the release type counter CS. For example, when the common pending number CRN is "0", one of the variable display times of 1.0 sec to 2.4 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 1. .7 sec. When the common pending number CRN is "1", one of the variable display times of 0.7 sec to 1.5 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 1.1 sec. is. When the common pending number CRN is "2", one of the variable display times of 0.5 sec to 1.3 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 0.9 sec. is. Then, when the common hold number CRN is "3" or more, one of the variable display times of 0.1 sec to 0.5 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 0.3 sec.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are set so that the shorter the period from the timing of consuming the pending information as the occurrence of the predetermined event, the higher the V winning rate. Specifically, as the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 among the distribution members 300 and 310, the shift from the non-distribution state to the distribution state is performed in 0.3 sec as the third period from the timing of consuming the reserved information. and this state is maintained for 1.0 sec as the fourth period. After that, the non-distribution state is maintained until the timing of digestion of the next hold information. The setting of this operation pattern is set in the distribution setting process (the second distribution setting process in step S804) in the already-described control start process (FIG. 19) and in the distribution process (FIG. 21). Further, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is the same as in each of the above-described embodiments, so the explanation is omitted.

After executing the process of step S1706, the validity determination process (similar to step S505) is executed in step S1707, and the control start process (similar to step S506) is executed in step S1708, then the game control process is executed. finish. If it is determined in step S1702 that it is in the role product control state, in step S1709 control processing (similar to step S507) is executed, and in step S1710 distribution processing (similar to step S508) is executed. After executing and executing the winning process (similar to step S509) in step S1711, the game control process is terminated.

The relationship between the length of the variable display time of game rounds and the V distribution in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46(b). Note that FIG. 46(b) shows, as an example, the average value of variable display times that can be selected according to each common reservation number CRN.

When the reserved information is digested at the timing of t1, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t2, which is 0.3 sec after the third period as described above. Then, the distributed state is maintained for 1.0 sec, which is the fourth period, and returns to the non-distributed state at the timing of t5.

If, for example, 1.7 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common pending number CRN is "0", the variable display on the main display section 43 is performed from timing t1 to timing t6, which is 1.7 seconds later. Then (the game round is executed), the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of t6. For example, when the game result is the result of opening (one time), the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t6, is maintained in the open state for 1.0 sec, and is opened at the timing of t9. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to an opening standby period of 1.7 sec from the time when the hold information is consumed at the timing of t1 to the timing of t6 as a predetermined event, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since there is no overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

If, for example, 1.1 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common pending number CRN is "1", the variable display on the main display section 43 is performed from timing t1 to timing t4, which is 1.1 sec later. Then (the game round is executed), the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing t4. For example, if the game result is a (one time) open result, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4, is maintained in the open state for 1.0 sec, and is opened at the timing of t8. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to an open waiting period of 1.1 sec from the time t1 when the hold information is consumed to the time t4 as a predetermined event, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.2 sec) from the timing t4 to the timing t5. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if the accessory device 150 wins at a timing other than that timing (a timing that does not overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), V distribution by the second distribution member 310 will not be performed. can't break

If, for example, 0.9 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common pending number CRN is "2", the variable display on the main display section 43 is performed from timing t1 to timing t3, which is 0.9 sec later. Then (the game round is executed), the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing t3. For example, when the game result is the result of opening (one time), the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t3, is maintained in the open state for 1.0 sec, and is opened at the timing of t7. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to an open waiting period of 0.9 sec from the time t1 when the pending information is consumed to the time t3 as a predetermined event, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.4 sec) from the timing t3 to the timing t5. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if the accessory device 150 wins at a timing other than that timing (a timing that does not overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), V distribution by the second distribution member 310 will not be performed. can't break Then, the period in which the period during which the prize can be won to the accessory device 150 and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap is "2" rather than when the common reservation number CRN is "1". is longer in the case of . That is, when the common reservation number CRN is "2", the V allocation is more likely to be performed than when it is "1".

If, for example, 0.3 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common pending number CRN is "3" or more, the variable display on the main display unit 43 will continue from timing t1 to timing t2, which is 0.3 sec later. The game is performed (the game round is executed), and the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing t2. For example, if the game result is a (one time) open result, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, is maintained in the open state for 1.0 sec, and is opened at the timing of t5. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to an open standby period of 0.3 sec from the time t1 when the hold information is consumed to the time t2 as a predetermined event, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (1.0 sec) from the timing t2 to the timing t5. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. The period in which the period during which prizes can be awarded to the accessory device 150 and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap are is "3" or more, the length is longer. That is, when the common reservation number CRN is "3" or more, the possibility of V allocation is higher than when it is "1" or "2".

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the number of common reserved numbers CRN increases, the variable display time of the game cycle tends to become shorter. , 310 are set, the probability of the V prize occurring increases as more pending information is stored. With this configuration, in a situation where pending information is likely to accumulate, such as during the opening/closing execution mode, a V prize is generated after that (after the opening/closing execution mode), and the opening/closing execution mode is resumed. It is possible to have a configuration in which sho is likely to occur. In addition, the easier it is to acquire hold information, the easier it is for a game machine to generate V prizes (easier to shift to the opening/closing execution mode), and the greater the range of fluctuations in the ball put-out rate, the more interesting it becomes. Become.

Also, in the case of a configuration having a high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of the electric accessory 39a being in an open state increases, the winning to the second operation port 39 occurs by setting the high-frequency support mode. Since it becomes easier, the common pending number CRN becomes easier to accumulate. That is, it becomes easier to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. In this way, it is possible to substantially change the rate of transition to the opening/closing execution mode without changing the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310, thereby diversifying the game.

In the above embodiment, the V winning rate is changed by changing the variable display time of each game round. As for the configuration for making it possible, the meaning is the same as the configuration for changing the waiting time for opening as in the second and third embodiments. Effect by changing the period can be expected.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310, the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set as the occurrence of a predetermined event, and each distribution member 300 and 310 operates periodically after the opening/closing execution mode ends. do.

Specifically, in the transition processing (step S1214) at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing (FIG. 23), the period (first period and third period) (processing of inputting numerical information corresponding to the first sorting counter and the second sorting counter). Then, as shown in FIG. 47, in the normal processing of the present embodiment, a distribution processing (step S508 in FIG. 16) is executed as one processing of the normal processing. That is, in steps S1801 to S1804, the same processes as those in steps S401 to S404 are executed, and in step S1805, distribution processing is executed. The processing of steps S1806 to S1810 is the same as the processing of steps S405 to S409.

Although detailed description with a figure is omitted, in the game control process (step S1803) in this embodiment, since the above-mentioned distribution process is performed in normal process, after executing the control process in step S507, Winning processing is executed in step S509, and the game control processing is terminated.

In the sorting process according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined in step S1901 whether or not the open/close execution mode is on. exit. This is because the setting of the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 during the open/close execution mode is executed in the game state transition process (FIG. 23). If it is determined in step S1901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, similarly to step S1001, it is determined whether or not it is the first distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the first distribution counter is grasped, and the first period (the period in which the first distribution member 300 is maintained in the non-distribution state) or the second period (the first distribution member 300 is distributed) It is determined whether or not it is time to end the period of maintaining the state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, then, in step S1903, similarly to step S1002, the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state, or changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. The first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. Further, in step S1903, a process of setting numerical value information corresponding to the period during which the displaced state is maintained in the first distribution counter is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, or if the processing of step S1903 has been executed, the process advances to step S1904. In step S1904, similarly to step S1003, it is determined whether or not it is the second distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the second distribution counter is grasped, and the third period (the period in which the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state) or the fourth period (the second distribution member 310 is distributed) It is determined whether or not it is time to end the period of maintaining the state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, then, in step S1905, as in step S1004, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state, or changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. The second distribution drive unit 310a is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. Further, in step S1905, a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the period during which the displaced state is maintained in the second allocation counter is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or if the processing of step S1905 has been executed, the distribution processing ends.

Next, control start processing (step S506) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, the control start process is a process that is started when opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is started in the game control process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S2001, processing for grasping the number of times of opening and closing is executed. This process is similar to the process of step S801. In subsequent step S2002, processing for grasping the distribution status of the first distribution member 300 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a and the numerical information of the first distribution counter, the current state of the first distribution member 300 can be changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. It executes a process of grasping information on whether it is a distribution state or information on the remaining period in which that state continues. In subsequent step S2003, processing for grasping the distribution status of the second distribution member 310 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the driving state of the second distribution driving unit 310a and the numerical information of the second distribution counter, the current state of the second distribution member 310 can be changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. It executes a process of grasping information on whether it is a distribution state or information on the remaining period in which that state continues.

In the subsequent step S2004, based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003, the opening/closing timing setting process for setting the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed, and then this control start process ends.

Specifically, in the processing of step S2004, based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003, the probabilities of the deviation distribution by the first distribution member 300 and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 are different. , set the open standby time. How the release waiting time is set will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 50, for example, after the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t1, the drive control of the first distribution member 300 is periodically performed each time the first period or the second period elapses, and the third It shows a configuration in which drive control of the second distribution member 310 is periodically performed every time the period or the fourth period elapses.

Winning occurs at the timing of t2, the number of times of opening is determined to be 1 in step S2001, the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state in step S2002, and after that (at the timing of t3) Suppose that it grasps that it will be displaced to the distribution state, and that the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state in step S2003 and that it will be displaced to the distribution state after that (at the timing of t6). . In this case, it is arranged so that the first distribution member 300 is more likely to perform the off-distribution, and the second distribution member 310 is less likely to perform the V distribution, that is, the V winning rate is lowered. , the first waiting time is set as the opening waiting time. Specifically, for example, the opening and closing accessory 168 is set to be in an open state at timing t4 during the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and this state is maintained until timing t6. set to When set as described above, the period during which prizes can be awarded to the accessory device 150 (the period from the timing t4 to the timing t6), and the deviation by the first distribution member 300 from the timing t4 to the timing t5 While it overlaps with the period in which distribution is performed, it does not overlap with the period in which V distribution by the 2nd distribution member 310 is performed.

On the other hand, a winning occurs at the timing of t8, the number of times of opening is determined to be 1 in step S2001, the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state in step S2002, and then (timing of t9 d) that the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distribution state in step S2003; Suppose that it grasps that it will be displaced to a distribution state after that (at the timing of t11). In this case, for example, depending on the game state (the number of common pending numbers CRN) and a predetermined lottery, unlike the case of the timing t2, the first distribution member 300 makes it difficult to distribute the deviation, and The second standby time is set as the open standby time so that the V allocation by the second allocating member 310 can be easily performed, that is, the V winning rate can be increased. For example, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to open at timing t11, which is the period after the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state, and that state changes to timing t15. set to be maintained until When set as described above, the period during which prizes can be awarded to the accessory device 150 (the period from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15), and the deviation by the first distribution member 300 during the timing of t14 to t15 Although the period overlaps with the period in which the allocation is performed, the ratio of overlap with the period in which the out-of-range allocation is performed is less than in the case where the first waiting time is set. Also, the period during which prizes can be awarded to the accessory device 150 overlaps with the period during which V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310 from timing t12 to timing t13, and the first waiting time is set. The ratio of overlap with the period in which V allocation is performed is greater than in the case of That is, the V winning rate is higher when the second waiting time is set than when the first waiting time is set.

As described above, even in the configuration in which the distribution members 300 and 310 operate periodically, the V winning rate can be varied by varying the release waiting time from the timing of consuming the reserved information as the occurrence of the predetermined event. becomes possible.

In the above configuration, the opening waiting time is set to be different according to the grasped operation status of each of the distribution members 300 and 310, and the V winning rate is set to be different. A configuration in which a waiting time is set may also be used. Specifically, by grasping the operation status of each sorting member 300, 310 when the reserved information is consumed, a period during which prizes can be awarded to the accessory device 150 and a period that overlaps with the sorting out are determined in advance. As a configuration for setting the opening standby time such that the first overlap period (first specific period) is set, or the period overlapping the V allocation is set to a predetermined second overlap period (second specific period) good too. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming at game balls to increase the V winning rate in accordance with the operating conditions of the periodically operating distribution members 300 and 310 .

In the above configuration, the game state at the time when the operation status of each distribution member 300, 310 is grasped (for example, the number of hold information stored as in the fourth embodiment, the game after the opening and closing execution mode) Depending on the number of times, the number of wins to the operation ports 38 and 39, the time using the RTC, etc.), the opening standby time may be changed so that the V winning rate is different.

In the above configuration, the V winning rate may be varied not only by the waiting time for opening, but also by varying the period during which the open state is maintained and the number of times of opening as in the second embodiment.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the rotational position of the rotating body 201 when a predetermined event occurs is grasped, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set based on the grasped result. Hereinafter, as an example of the occurrence of the predetermined event, the time when the hold information is consumed during the normal game state will be described as the predetermined event.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing open/close timing setting processing in this embodiment. As already described, the opening/closing timing setting process is a process (step S802 in FIG. 19) that is performed as a control start process (step S506) when the reservation information is consumed in the game control process (FIG. 16).

In this embodiment, first, in steps S2101 to S2104, the same processes as in steps S801 to S804 are executed to grasp the number of times of opening and closing, set the timing of opening and closing, and set the operation of each distribution member 300, 310. . In step S2102 of the present embodiment, the opening/closing timing is set in the same manner as in step S802. However, as will be described later, the opening/closing timing may be changed after that, so the opening/closing timing is provisionally set. It can also be called processing.

In the following step S2104, processing for grasping the current position of the rotating body 201 is executed. More specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 196, the processing of grasping the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 in the rotating body 201 is executed. Then, in step S2105, based on the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102, the period during which the game ball can enter the accessory device 150 is grasped, and if the game ball wins during that period, the game ball The timing of reaching the lead-out unit 186 is grasped, and based on the grasped results, processing for calculating the position of the rotating body 201 when the game ball that has won the prize device 150 reaches the lead-out unit 186 is executed. More specifically, it is assumed that it takes about 1.0 sec for the game ball that has won the role device 150 to reach the lead-out portion 186. It shows the period of the route in which the game ball reaches the lead-out portion 186 without being distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, and this route is also referred to as the normal route in the following description), and the prize to the accessory device 150. is possible, that is, the timing is delayed by 1.0 sec from the period temporarily set so that the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. Whether or not it is arranged is calculated from the detection signal of the rotational position detection sensor 196 .

In the subsequent step S2107, it is determined whether or not the V winning is possible in the normal route based on the result of the processing in step S2106. That is, assuming that the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the lead-out portion 186 as a normal route, the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 can receive the game ball that has reached the lead-out portion 186 at that timing. It is determined whether or not it is located in the If a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if V winning is not possible in the normal route, the process advances to step S2108 to execute change lottery processing to determine whether or not to change the opening/closing timing. In this process, lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and lottery tables are obtained from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and opening/closing timing change lottery is executed based on these. Incidentally, the winning probability of this lottery is set to 10% in this embodiment.

In step S2109, based on the result of processing in step S2108, it is determined whether or not the change lottery has been won. If the change lottery is not won, the main opening/closing timing setting process is terminated. That is, in this case, the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed.

If it is determined in step S2109 that the change lottery has been won, a first opening/closing timing change process is executed in step S2110. In this process, the process of changing the opening/closing waiting time is executed so that the V prize can be won in the normal route. More specifically, the current V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 ascertained in step S2105, the period (about 1.0 sec) required for the game ball to reach the lead-out portion 186 in the normal route, Then, the timing at which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state makes it possible to win the prize to the accessory device 150 at the timing when the V prize can be won in the normal route, and at the timing calculated backward. The opening/closing waiting time is changed so that the opening/closing accessory 168 is in an open state. After that, the main opening/closing timing setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2107 that the V prize can be won by the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, by opening the opening and closing accessory 168 at the timing temporarily set in step S2102, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that distribution (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 will be performed. . Specifically, when the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap, the second distribution member It is determined that V distribution by 310 may be performed. When it is determined that there is no possibility of V distribution, that is, when there is a possibility of V winning in the normal route and there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 ends the open/close timing setting process. In this case, the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed.

If it is determined in step S2111 that there is a possibility that V distribution will be performed by the second distribution member 310, that is, if it is determined that there is a possibility of V winning in both the normal route and V distribution , the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, processing for temporarily changing the opening/closing timing (opening/closing standby time) provisionally set in step S2102 is executed. More specifically, for example, the opening/closing timing is provisionally changed so that the opening/closing control is started at a timing delayed by a predetermined period (0.5 sec) from the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102. In the following step S2113, it is determined whether or not V winning is possible in the normal route when the opening/closing pattern is set to the opening/closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112. If it is determined in step S2112 that it is not possible to win a V prize in the normal route, that is, even if there is a possibility of winning a V prize in the normal route or in V distribution at the opening/closing timing temporarily set in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2113. If there is no V winning in the normal route with the temporarily changed opening/closing timing, the opening/closing timing setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the opening/closing timing provisionally changed in step S2112 is not adopted, and the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2113 that V winning is possible in the normal route even with the opening/closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112, second opening/closing timing change processing is executed in step S2114. , the opening/closing timing setting process ends. In the second opening/closing timing change process, the setting of the opening/closing waiting time (that is, the process of re-inputting the numerical information corresponding to the waiting period counter) is executed so as to apply the opening/closing pattern temporarily changed in step S2112.

How the opening/closing timing is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the hold information is digested at the timing of t1, and the opening/closing timing is changed so that the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4. It is assumed that provisional setting has been performed (processing of step S2102). FIG. 52(a) shows a case where V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed from timing t5 to timing t6, and overlap with the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state does not occur. ing. That is, in this case, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 . However, until the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the lead-out portion 186, as a result of the rotation of the rotating body 201, the game ball can be led out to the V winning opening guide portion 204 at the lead-out portion 186. have a nature. That is, it is a case where affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and negative determination is made in step S2111. In this case, the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is not changed, and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed at the same opening/closing timing.

In FIG. 51(b), there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 as in the case of FIG. 51(a), but unlike the case of FIG. It indicates the possibility of winning a prize. That is, this is the case where a negative determination is made in step S2107. In this case, if the change lottery is won through the change lottery process in step S2108, the first opening/closing timing change process is performed in step S2110.

As an opening/closing pattern after the change, in pattern 1, the opening/closing standby time is changed (delayed) from timing t2 to timing t2.1. Note that the timing of t2.1 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (timing from 5 to t6). Then, without changing the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is maintained in the open state, t4.1 is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlapping timing with V allocation (later than the timing of t5 to t6). is displaced to the closed state at the timing of As a result, the time in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time in which the second distribution member 310 can perform V distribution overlap.

The opening/closing pattern after the change is not limited to the above example, and may be changed as follows.

As an opening/closing pattern after the change, in pattern 2, the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is changed (lengthened) without changing the opening/closing waiting time from the timing of t2. The timing at which the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state remains at t2, but the timing at which it is displaced to the closed state is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlapping timing with the V allocation (from t5 to t6). It is displaced at the timing of t4.2 (later than the timing).

As an opening/closing pattern after change, pattern 3 shows an example in which both the opening/closing waiting time and the time during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is kept open are changed. That is, in pattern 3, the open/close standby time is changed to timing t2.2, which is later than timing t2, and the timing of shifting to the closed state is changed to timing t4.2, which is later than timing t4. Note that the timing of t2.2 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (timing from 5 to t6).

As an opening/closing pattern after the change, in pattern 4, the number of times of opening/closing is changed, and the time during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time during which the second distribution member 310 can perform V distribution overlap. An example of changing the opening/closing pattern is shown. In this example, the normal opening result, which is the number of opening times of one, is changed to the special opening result, which is the number of opening times of two shown in the second embodiment, so that overlap with the V distribution occurs. An example is shown, and the opening/closing accessory 168 displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 is once closed at the timing of t2.3, and then displaced to the open state again at the timing of t2.4. The timing of t2.4 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (timing from 5 to t6). Then, at the timing of t4.2, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

As an opening/closing pattern after the change, pattern 5 shows an example in which the opening/closing pattern is changed so that the positional relationship of the rotating body 201 allows V winning in the normal route. More specifically, the current position of the V winning opening guide part 204 of the rotating body 201 is grasped, and the V winning opening guiding part 204 of the rotating body 201 reaches the lead-out part 186 from the rotation speed of the rotating body 201. The period is calculated, and based on the calculation result and the time required for the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 to reach the lead-out part 186, the opening/closing timing at which the V prize can be won in the normal route is calculated backward. For example, the opening/closing timing is changed so as to shift to the open state at timing t2.5 as the backward calculated opening/closing timing, and to shift to the closed state at timing t4.3 after that.

It should be noted that each of the change patterns described above is merely an example, and may be configured to change to other open/close patterns. The point is that if it is determined that the V prize will not occur in the normal route, the opening/closing pattern is changed to the opening/closing pattern that increases the possibility of the V prize.

In FIG. 53, when there is a possibility that a V prize may occur in both the normal route and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310, that is, the affirmative determination is made in step S2107, and the affirmative determination is made in step S2111. indicates the case. For example, it is assumed that the temporary setting of the opening/closing timing is performed so that the pending information is digested at the timing of t1, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 and to the closed state at the timing of t6 ( processing of step S2102). Also, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, which overlaps with the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. Further, the V-winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is also arranged at a position where V-winning is possible in the normal route with the opening/closing pattern temporarily set at present.

In this case, in step S2112, as a temporary change process, for example, a process of temporarily changing the opening/closing standby time to the open state at timing t2.1, which is delayed by a predetermined time (0.5 sec), is executed. In this example, the timing of t2.1 is later than the timing of V allocation (timing from t3 to t4), and there is no possibility of V winning due to V allocation in the open/close pattern after the temporary change. Also, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.1, and then displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 in the same manner as described above. That is, in this example, the period during which the open state is maintained becomes short. Then, in step S2113, it is determined from the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 whether or not it is possible to win a V prize in the normal route with the tentatively changed opening/closing pattern. If it is determined that the V prize can be won in the normal route even with the opening/closing pattern, a second opening/closing timing change process is executed to set the tentatively changed opening/closing pattern as the current opening/closing pattern in step S2114. As a result, the opening/closing timing is changed so that only the possibility of winning V on the normal route remains.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the relationship between the position of the rotating body 201 and the position of the rotating body 201 at the time of digestion of the pending information as a predetermined event, the opening and closing timing of the opening and closing accessory 168 is set. Therefore, each distribution member It is possible to change the V winning rate in consideration of not only the operation patterns of 300 and 310 but also the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, thereby diversifying the opening/closing patterns to be set. In this case, since only the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, the player feels unfair. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Based on the result of grasping the position of the rotating body 201, it is determined whether or not it is possible to win the V prize in the normal route. can be implemented). As a result, by changing the opening/closing pattern, the V winning rate can be improved, and the player can expect the opening/closing execution mode.

In this first opening/closing timing change process, a change lottery process is performed, and when the change lottery is won, the change process is performed. may be configured. Specifically, the number of stored pending information, the number of games played after the opening/closing execution mode (the number of digested pending information), the number of winnings to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the opening/closing execution mode, per unit time The probability of winning varies depending on the rate of V winning (occurrence rate of opening and closing execution mode), the rate of ball output per unit time (the rate of the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls paid out), etc. may be

Even if the temporarily set opening/closing pattern allows V winning in the normal route, if the opening/closing pattern allows V allocation, a temporary change process is performed, and after the temporary change by the temporary change process. However, if V winning is possible in the normal route, the second opening/closing timing changing process is executed to change to the opening/closing pattern after the temporary change. As a result, when a V prize is generated, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of the normal route instead of the V distribution. Here, when the game ball enters the accessory device 150 and reaches the ball sorting portion 185 of the guide passage 183 and then is sorted to the warp passage 250, if it is not sorted to the warp passage 250 (that is, the normal route is The visibility of the game ball is lower than when passing through). In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the warp passage 250, the action mode of the game ball becomes less visible from the front of the gaming machine than when the game ball is not distributed to the warp passage 250.例文帳に追加The game balls distributed to the warp passage 250 are drawn out as they are so as to win V prizes, while the game balls not distributed to the warp passage 250 are distributed by the first distribution member 300 after that. V wins through minutes and sorting by the rotating body 201 . Therefore, from the viewpoint of drawing attention to the action mode of the game ball, distributing it to the warp path 250 is easier than distributing it to the warp path 250 to enhance the effect of drawing attention to the action mode. Therefore, as described above, if both the normal route and the V distribution are possible, the opening and closing timing should be changed on the condition that the V prize can occur in the normal route even after the change. By doing so, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of V prizes on the normal route side, and it is possible to increase interest in the operation mode of the game ball.

In the above configuration, after the temporary change, whether or not V distribution can occur, that is, whether or not the time during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state overlaps with the time during which V distribution can be performed. may be determined, and the opening/closing pattern may be changed so that V prizes can be won in the normal route and V allocation cannot occur. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably achieve the effect of generating a V prize on the normal route side. However, in this case, there is concern about an extreme increase in processing load. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, irrespective of whether or not V allocation occurs after the temporary change, if only the normal route side is subject to determination, the increase in processing load can be suppressed while the normal route It is possible to obtain an effect by generating a V prize on the side.

By performing the second opening/closing timing changing process as described above, the total V winning rate can be lowered. Specifically, the open/close pattern that allowed V winning in both the normal route and V allocation was changed to an opening/closing pattern that allowed V winning only in the normal route. The V prize rate can be lowered by the amount. Therefore, for example, when such a second opening/closing timing changing process is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which a benefit is given accordingly. Specifically, when the 16R continuation mode is likely to be selected as the opening/closing execution mode that occurs when the second opening/closing timing change process is performed, or when the second opening/closing timing change process is performed, After that, a configuration or the like is conceivable in which the probability of performing the first opening/closing timing change process increases (the probability of winning the change lottery process in step S2108 increases). By doing so, it is possible to favorably compensate for the decrease in the V winning rate, while achieving the effect of performing the second opening/closing timing change process.

In the above-described embodiment, the holding information is digested as the occurrence of the predetermined event in which the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set. may be generated. In this case, for example, the opening/closing pattern (A to C) set for each round is assumed to be a provisionally set opening/closing pattern, and the possibility of a V prize occurring in the normal route in the provisionally set opening/closing pattern is grasped. , the provisionally set meter closing pattern may be changed.

In this case, for example, in the changed lottery process, the odds of winning may differ depending on the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode, or the odds of winning may vary depending on the number of times of opening/closing (RC2) in one round. For example, if the number of times of opening and closing in one round is set so that the probability of winning is lower when the number of times of opening and closing is lower than when the number of times of opening and closing is large, V prizes will occur with a small number of times of opening and closing in one round, and the maximum number of wins will be reached. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the round ends even though it does not meet the requirements.

Also, as a privilege to compensate for the decrease in the V winning rate due to the second opening/closing timing change processing being performed, the number of times the second opening/closing timing change processing is performed during one round will affect the subsequent change lottery processing. A configuration in which the probability of winning is high may be adopted. That is, the more the second opening/closing timing change process is performed, the more likely it is that the first opening/closing timing change process is performed, and the V winning rate is reduced when the second opening/closing timing change process is performed. Also, it is possible to increase the subsequent V prize winning rate and keep the round continuation rate from becoming low (while increasing the round continuation rate), and at the same time, it is possible to attract attention to the operation mode of the game ball.

As described above, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening/closing timing change process is performed, the change lottery in one round is determined by the number of times the second opening/closing timing change process is performed during the round. If the winning probability of the process is increased, the probability of V winning (round continuation) when opening and closing the back side in one round can be made higher than when opening and closing the front side. This not only suppresses the occurrence of the inconvenience that the number of rounds is updated due to the round continuing early in each round, but also makes it possible to expect the V prize of the normal route at the stage where the number of times of opening and closing in one round is small. It is possible to realize a novel game in which the operation mode of the game ball is entertained by the operation of the game ball, and as the number of times of opening and closing increases and the end of the round is approached, the V distribution is likely to occur.

In addition, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening/closing timing change processing is performed, the number of times the second opening/closing timing change processing is performed is reflected in the winning probability of the changed lottery processing in the next and subsequent rounds. If it is configured, the case of winning V (continuing the round) in the normal route is more advantageous than the case of winning V (continuing the round) due to V distribution, and the operation mode of the game ball. It is possible to attract more interest. For example, based on the fact that the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process has been performed reaches or exceeds a predetermined number of times, the winning probability of the changed lottery process may be increased in subsequent rounds, or the probability of winning the changed lottery process may be increased in subsequent rounds. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of selecting the open/close pattern A, which is the ratio, is high.

In addition to the number of times the second opening/closing timing change process is performed, the number of V wins (round continuation) after the second opening/closing timing change process is performed is reflected in the subsequent round continuation rate. may be

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the route through which the game ball entering the accessory device passes is grasped. Configurations different from the above embodiments will be described below.

55 and 56 show the accessory device 400 of this embodiment. Note that the role product device 400 of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the role product device 150 of each of the above embodiments. In FIGS. 55 and 56, the same reference numerals are used for the same parts as in the above embodiments, and the description of these parts is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 55, in order to make it easier to understand the parts that are different from the above-described respective embodiments, they are partially cut away.

The guide path 183 in the accessory device 400 is provided with a first passage detection sensor 401 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the guide path 183 . The first passage detection sensor 401 is a flat sensor capable of detecting changes in the magnetic field on the detection surface (upper surface), and is arranged below the rail forming the floor surface of the guide passage 183 . The first passage detection sensor 401 includes a left passage detection sensor 402 provided in the guide passage 183 on the side where the first distribution member 300 is provided (left side in front view), and the first distribution member 300. and a right passage detection sensor 403 provided in the guide passage 183 on the side not facing (on the right side in front view). The left passage detection sensor 402 is provided in the left guide passage 183 on the downstream side (the lead-out portion 186 side) of the position where the first distribution member 300 is provided. In the following description, the area in which the left passage detection sensor 402 is provided in the guidance passage 183 is referred to as the left passage area 412 (left passage portion 412), and the area in which the right passage detection sensor 403 is provided is referred to as the right passage area 413 (right passage). Section 413).

The warp passage 250 in the accessory device 400 is provided with a second passage detection sensor 404 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the warp passage 250 . The second passage detection sensor 404 is a passage-type detection sensor that has an opening and can detect a game ball passing through the opening. In the following description, the area where the second passage detection sensor 404 is provided in the warp passage 250 is referred to as a second passage area 414 (second passage portion 414, back passage area 414, back passage portion 414). Further, the second passage detection sensor 404 is also referred to as a depth passage detection sensor 404 .

The first passage detection sensors 402 and 403 and the second passage detection sensor 404 are connected to the main controller 81 . The MPU 112 of the main control device 81 can grasp the state of the detection signals from the respective sensors 402, 403, 404 to grasp that the game ball has passed. More specifically, when the state of the detection signal from each sensor 402, 403, 404 changes from an OFF state not corresponding to the detection of the game ball to a corresponding ON state, the passage of the game ball is detected in the corresponding passage portion. It grasps that it has started, and grasps that one game ball has passed based on the fact that it has been switched to the OFF state.

FIG. 57 shows timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in steps S101 to S105, similar to the timer interrupt process in each of the embodiments described above, various sensor reading processes and winning processes for operating openings are executed. After that, in step S2301, the pass area processing is executed, and then the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Passing area processing includes the information that the game ball passed through the left passing area 412, the right passing area 413, and the back passing area 414, and other ball entering portions (for example, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, V This is a process of performing predetermined arithmetic processing based on the information on the ball entering the winning hole 182a, etc., comparing the result of the arithmetic processing with a set value, and outputting the result to the outside.

Here, prior to the explanation of the above-mentioned passing area processing, the processing for grasping the information of the ball entering another ball entering portion will be explained with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the prize winning process for the actuation opening in this embodiment, and FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the prize winning process for the accessory device 400 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the winning processing for the working opening in this embodiment, the processing based on the winning of the first working opening 38 is performed in steps S201 to S205 in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments. After executing the process of step S205, the process of adding 1 to the first prize number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed in step S2401. The first winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of winnings to the first operation opening 38 during a predetermined period. If a negative determination is made in step S201, the processing based on the winning of the second operation opening 39 is performed in steps S207 to S211, as in the above embodiments. After executing the process of step S211, the process of adding 1 to the second winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed in step S2402. The second winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of winnings to the second operation opening 39 during a predetermined period. After the processing of step S2401 or step S2402 is performed, the information acquisition processing is performed in step S206, and then the winning processing for the operation opening is terminated.

In the winning process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, as in the above-described embodiments, it is determined in step S1101 whether or not a winning has occurred in the accessory device 400, and if a winning has occurred. If so, in step S1102, an intra-accessory prize winning command is set to be output. After executing the process of step S1102, the process of adding 1 to the winning prize number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed in step S2501. The prize-winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of prizes awarded to the prize-winning device 400 during a predetermined period.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S2501 has been executed, the process advances to step S1103. The processing from step S1103 to step S1106 is the same as in each of the above embodiments, and is processing based on the occurrence of the V prize. After performing the processing of step S1106, in step S2502, the processing of adding 1 to the V winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed. The V winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of winnings to the V winning opening 182a during a predetermined period. When a negative determination is made in step S1103, or after the process of step S2502 is executed, the winning process is terminated.

Thus, the information that has won the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39 is the information used for the subsequent control of the opening/closing accessory 168 (the first start retention memory number RaN and the second start retention memory number RbN) Separately, it is stored as a first winning number counter and a second winning number counter. Also, the information that a prize has been won in the role-thing device 400 or the V winning hole 182a is information (in-the-accessory Separately from the winning command and the V winning flag), it is stored as a prize winning quantity counter and a V winning prize counter. This is due to the fact that although both pieces of information are information corresponding to ball entry into each ball entry section, the purposes for which the information is used are different. In other words, while the reserved memory count, prize winning command within the accessory, and V prize flag are used for the progress of the game, the respective counters move the above-mentioned left passing area 412, right passing area 413, and back passing area 414 to the game balls. is used for arithmetic processing of the information passed through.

Next, the passing area processing in step S2301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the passing area processing, each passing area is detected in steps S2601 to S2603, a process for counting a predetermined period is performed in steps S2604 to S2608, an arithmetic process is performed in step S2609, and an arithmetic process is performed in step S2610. Comparison processing is performed in step S2611, and output processing is performed in step S2611. Each will be described in detail below.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing left passing area detection processing performed in step S2601.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 stores a jammed left ball flag. The left ball clogging flag is a flag stored when the MPU 112 grasps that a ball clogging has occurred in the left passing area 412. More specifically, the left passing detection sensor 402 detects a game ball. This flag is stored based on the fact that the presence state has continued for a first period (26 msec in this embodiment). If the left ball clogging flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2702 to determine whether or not the left passage flag is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The left passage flag is a flag stored based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the left passage detection sensor 402. More specifically, the left passage detection sensor 402 detects the game ball. This flag is stored based on the state continuing for the second period (8 msec in this embodiment).

If the left passage flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2703 to determine whether or not the left detection flag is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The flag during left detection is a flag stored based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the left passing detection sensor 402 . If the left detection flag is not stored, it means that the game ball was not detected by the left passage detection sensor 402 in the previous process. detects a game ball (is in an ON state) based on the state of the detection signal from the left detection sensor 402. When the left passage detection sensor 402 has detected the game ball, after executing the processing of storing the left detection flag in step S2705, this detection processing ends. Also, in step S2704, if the left passage detection sensor 402 does not detect, the detection processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the left detection flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the left passing detection sensor 402 detects the game ball in this process as well. When the left passage detection sensor 402 detects the game ball, the processing of adding 1 to the counter during left detection provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed in step S2707. The left detection counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the period during which the left passage detection sensor 402 continues to detect the game ball. After performing the addition processing in step S2707, in step S2708, based on the processing result of step S2707, it is determined whether or not the counter during left detection has become "3". It is determined whether or not the state of detecting the ball has continued over four processing times (8 msec).

If it is determined in step S2708 that the counter during left detection is "3", processing for storing a left passage flag is executed in step S2709. If it is determined in step S2706 that the left passage detection sensor 402 has not detected the game ball, or after storing the left passage flag in step S2709, the left detection flag is erased in step S2710. After that, the detection process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S2708 that the counter during left detection is less than "3", this detection processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2702 that the left passage flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2711. In step S2711, it is determined whether or not the left passing detection sensor 402 detects a game ball. When the left passage detection sensor 402 does not detect the game ball, that is, although the game ball was detected over 4 processing times, if the game ball is not detected in this processing, the left passage area 412 Assuming that the game ball has passed through, a process of adding 1 to the left passing number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed in step S2712. The left passage number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of passages in the left passage area 412 during a predetermined period. Then, in step S2713, the left passage flag is cleared, and in step S2714, the counter during left detection is reset to 0, after which the present detection process ends.

On the other hand, when the game ball is still detected by the left passing detection sensor 402 in step S2711, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, a process of adding 1 to the counter during left detection is executed. Then, in step S2716, whether or not the counter during left detection has reached "12", that is, the state in which the game ball is detected by the left passage detection sensor 402 continues over 13 processing times (26 msec). determine whether or not When the counter during left detection is less than "12", the present detection processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the counter during left detection is "12", there is a high possibility that the game ball stays in the left passing area 412 (ball clogging has occurred). Therefore, the flow advances to step S2717 to clear the left passage flag, and resets the counter during left detection to 0 in step S2718. Then, in step S2719, processing for storing the left ball clogging flag is executed, and then this detection processing ends.

When it is determined in step S2701 that the left ball clogging flag is stored, in step S2720 it is determined whether or not the left passing detection sensor 402 is still detecting the game ball. If it is detected, the detection process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the game ball has not been detected, there is a high possibility that the clogging of the left passing area 412 has been resolved. , the detection process is terminated.

The right passing area detection processing in step S2602 and the depth passing area detection processing in step S2603 are shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, and are substantially the same as the left passing area detection processing. The difference is that various flags (left detecting flag, left passing flag, left ball clogging flag) and various counters (left detecting counter, left passing number counter) correspond to each passing area (right detecting flag, right passing flag, right ball clogging flag, right detecting counter, right passing number counter, depth detecting flag, back passing flag, back ball clogging flag, back detecting counter, back passing number counter) are used. This is the criterion for determining that ball clogging has occurred. The criteria for determining that a ball clogging has occurred are that the game ball has been continuously detected for 26 msec in the left passing area detection process, and the game ball has been detected for 20 msec in the right passing area detection process. It is assumed that the detection has been continued (step S2816), and that the game ball has been continuously detected over 14 msec in the detection processing of the depth passage area (step S2916).

In other words, the criteria for determining ball jam are that the left passing area 412 is longer (loosely) than the right passing area 413, and the back passing area 414 is longer than the left and right passing areas 412 and 413. is set to This is for the following reasons. That is, in the left passage area 412, the first distribution member 300 exists on the upstream side thereof, and for example, when the first distribution member 300 passes over the first distribution member 300 at the switching operation timing of the first distribution member 300, The passing speed of the game ball passing through the left passing area 412 can vary. Then, for example, when passing through the left passing area 412 with the passing speed reduced by the first distribution member 300 , the passing speed becomes slower than when passing through the right passing area 413 . Therefore, by making the left passing area 412 longer than the right passing area 413 as described above, it is not determined that the ball is clogged when the speed is reduced by the first distribution member 300. I'm trying

In addition, the back passage area 414 has a steeper vertical slope than the left and right passage areas 412 and 413 (see FIG. 55), and the speed of passing through the back passage area 414 is higher than that of the left and right passage areas 412 and 413 . It tends to be faster than the speed passing through Furthermore, the back passage area 414 is an area that is difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine, and is an area with low visibility compared to the left and right passage areas 412 and 413 . Therefore, it can be said that a player or a manager of a game hall is less likely to notice a jammed ball in the inner passage area 414 than a jammed ball in the left and right passing areas 412 and 413 . Comparing the probability that the game ball that has passed through the back passage area 414 is drawn to the V winning opening 182a and the probability that the game ball that has passed through the left and right passing areas 412 and 413 is drawn to the V winning opening 182a, Since the left and right passing areas 412 and 413 pass through the distribution of the rotating body 201, it is easier to lead to the V winning opening 182a when passing through the back passing area 414. FIG. In other words, the passage speed in the back passage area 414 is more likely to be faster than in the left and right passage areas 412 and 413, and it is difficult to notice ball clogging. can be large. Therefore, by setting the criteria for judging ball clogging in the back passage area 414 to be shorter (stricter) than the criteria in the left and right passage areas 412 and 413, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of ball clogging more quickly. Become.

In the passing area processing (FIG. 60), after each passing area is detected in steps S2601 to S2603, firing state grasping processing is executed in step S2604. In the firing state grasping process, when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 60 (the touch sensor provided on the firing handle 60 is in the ON state), the firing handle 60 is moved from the initial position toward the maximum operation position. It is recognized that the game ball is being shot when all the shooting conditions are satisfied, that is, the operation is performed by a predetermined amount and the stop switch (shooting stop switch) provided on the shooting handle 60 is not operated. However, if any of the shooting conditions are not met, it is determined that the game ball has not been shot. Then, in step S2605, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being shot based on the processing result of step S2604.

When it is determined that the game ball is being shot, the process proceeds to step S2606, and the process of adding 1 to the shot number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed for each shooting cycle. As already explained, the pachinko machine 10 shoots game balls with a shooting period of 0.6 sec when the shooting operation is performed. Therefore, in step S2606, various flags and counters are used to add 1 to the firing number counter 1 once every timer interrupt process 300 (2 msec.times.300=0.6 sec).

When it is determined that the game ball has not been shot, the process proceeds to step S2607, and it is determined whether or not the stop period during which the game ball is not shot has reached a predetermined multiple (three times) or more of the shooting cycle. In such processing, for example, various flags and counters are used to determine whether or not the state in which the game ball has not been shot has continued over the timer interrupt processing 900 processing times (2 msec×900=1.8 sec). When the stop period is equal to or longer than the predetermined times of the firing period, processing for resetting each passing number counter and each winning number counter to 0 is performed in step S2608.

After performing the processing of step S2606 or step S2608, or when it is determined in step S2607 that the stop period is less than the predetermined multiple of the firing cycle, the process proceeds to step S2609. Then, in steps S2609 to S2611, arithmetic processing, comparison processing, and output processing are performed, respectively, and then the passing area processing ends.

First, the arithmetic processing in step S2609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3001, a process of grasping the value of each passing number counter is executed. Then, in step S3002, it is determined whether or not all passing number counters are zero. If any passing number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, a process of grasping the number of shots by referring to the value of the shot number counter is executed. In the subsequent step S3004, a process of grasping the value of each winning number counter is executed. In the subsequent step S3005, a process of calculating the passing rate of each passing area 412 to 414 with respect to the number of shots is performed. In this process, the value of each passage number counter grasped in step S3001 is divided by the value of the shot number counter grasped in step S3003, thereby calculating the passage rate of each passage area per unit number of shots. can be done. The passage rate of each passage area per unit number of shots is an index indicating how many times the passage area is passed. Then, a process of storing the calculated passing rate in the RAM 114 is performed.

In the subsequent step S3006, a process of calculating the passing rate of each of the passing areas 412 to 414 with respect to the number of winnings to each of the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, and the accessory device 400 is performed. In this process, the value of each passing number counter ascertained in step S3001 is divided by the value of each winning number counter ascertained in step S3004. It is possible to calculate the passing rate of each passing area per number. The passing rate of each passing area per unit number of entering balls is an index indicating how many winning times in the entering ball sections 38, 39, 400 the passing area passes through each passing area. Then, a process of storing the calculated passing rate in the RAM 114 is performed.

In the subsequent step S3007, a process of calculating the V winning rate with respect to the number of passing areas 412 to 414 is performed. In this process, the value of the V winning number counter of the V winning opening 182a ascertained in step S3004 is divided by the value of each passage number counter ascertained in step S3001. A V prize rate per number can be calculated. The V prize rate per unit passing number is an index that indicates the rate of one V prize per passage in the passage areas 412 to 414 . Then, a process of storing the calculated V winning percentage in the RAM 114 is performed. After that, the arithmetic processing ends.

When all passing number counters are 0 in step S3002, it is determined whether or not the V prize number counter is 0 in step S3008. If it is 0, the arithmetic processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the V winning number counter is not 0 in step S3008, that is, if a V winning occurs even though all the passing number counters are 0, then in step S3009 the RAM 114 The V error state is set by storing the V error flag in the various flag storage area 114e. The V error state is a situation in which a V winning occurs even though the game balls have not passed through the passage areas 412 to 414 of the accessory device 400 . By setting the V error state, an external output is performed in the output process (FIG. 67) of step S2611, and the game stop process is performed. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the comparison processing in step S2610 will be described while calculating the flowchart in FIG. The comparison process is a process of comparing a setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 in advance and each numerical value calculated by the above arithmetic processing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the passing rate of each passing area with respect to the number of shots, the passing rate with respect to each winning number, and the V winning rate with respect to unit passage of the passing area are set. For example, as the passing rate for the number of shots, the passing rate of the left passing area 412 is set to "0.005" as a set value, and the left passing area 412 is passed at a rate of once every 200 shots fired. is set as an index for judging that is “normal”. In addition, the passing rate of the right passing area 413 is set to "0.01" as a set value, and it is determined that passing through the right passing area 413 at a rate of once every 100 shots is "normal". The right passing area 413 is set as an index to pass through more easily than the left passing area 412 . In addition, as already explained, the difference in ease of passage is due to the presence or absence of the first distribution member 300 . The passing rate of the far passing area 414 is set to "0.0001" as a set value, and is an index for determining that passing through the far passing area 414 at a rate of once per 1000 shots is "normal". is set as

As for the passing rate for the winning to the first working port 38, the left passing region 412 passes through the left passing region 412 once every eight times winning the first working port 38, and the right passing region 413 passes once every four times. The set values are set so that passing through the back passing area 414 once in 40 times is an indicator that it is judged to be "normal". In addition, the passing rate for the winning to the second operating port 39 is set to twice the passing rate for the first operating port 38. The number of times of opening and closing is two times, which corresponds to twice the number of times of opening and closing based on the winning of the first operation opening 38 .

As for the passing rate of the prize-winning to the accessory device 400, the left passing area 412 is passed once every four times, the right passing area 413 is passed once every two times, and the right passing area 413 is passed once every 20 times. The set values are set so that passing through the back passage area 414 at a rate of .

As for the V prize rate per unit passage in each of the passage areas 412 to 414, one V prize occurs when the left and right passage areas 412 and 413 are passed six times, and one V prize is generated when the back passage area 414 is passed once. The setting values are set so that the occurrence of the V prize is an index for determining that it is "normal". The fact that there is no difference in the V winning rate between the left and right passing areas 412 and 413 means that the first distributing member 300 is arranged upstream of the left passing area 412 . This is due to the fact that the rate at which it passes does not affect what happens after passing through the left passing region 412 .

Here, the set value may be a value set in the pachinko machine 10 in advance as shown in FIG. 66, or may be set by the manager of the game hall. When the game hall manager sets, for example, an operation switch for setting the set value is provided on the back of the main controller 81 . The setting value can be set by operating the operation switch. By providing the operation switch at a position that can be operated by opening the inner frame 13, access to the operation switch by anyone other than the manager of the game hall can be restricted. For setting values, for example, a setting value table in which a plurality of setting values are stored may be provided in the ROM 113, and details of the setting ratio of each passing rate and V winning rate may be grasped by reading the setting value table. Further, in the configuration in which settings are made by means of operation switches, it is preferable to provide a plurality of setting value tables and to change which setting value table to refer to by operating the operation switch.

Now, in the comparison process (FIG. 65), first, in step S3101, a setting value reading process is executed. In the subsequent step S3102, a process of comparing the passing rate with respect to the number of shots calculated in the above step S3005 and the set value is executed. In subsequent step S3103, it is determined whether or not the current passage rate is within the range of +10% to -10% of the set value based on the result of the comparison processing in step S3102. For example, in the case of the passing rate for the number of shots in the left passing area 412 in FIG. 0045). If it is not within the range, in step S3104, a shot count error flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, thereby setting the shot count error state. If it is determined in step S3103 that it is within the range, it is determined that the state is normal, and the firing number error state is not set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3103, or if the process of step S3104 has been executed, the process advances to step S3105. In step S3105, a process of comparing the passing rate for each winning number calculated in step S3006 with a set value is executed. In subsequent step S3106, it is determined whether or not the current passage rate is within the range of +10% to -10% of the set value based on the result of the comparison processing in step S3105. For example, in the case of the passing rate for winning the first operation opening 38 in the left passing area 412 in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of -10% (0.1125). If it is not within the range, in step S3107, by storing the winning number error flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the winning number error state is set. If it is determined in step S3106 that the number is within the range, it is determined that the state is normal, and the winning number error state is not set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3106, or if the process of step S3107 has been executed, the process advances to step S3108. In step S3108, a process of comparing the V winning rate for each passing number calculated in step S3007 with the set value is executed. In subsequent step S3109, it is determined whether or not the current V winning rate is within the range of +10% to -10% of the set value based on the result of the comparison processing in step S3108. For example, in the case of the V winning rate for passing through the left passing area 412 in FIG. 117). If it is not within the range, in step S3110, the V winning rate error flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, thereby setting the V winning rate error state. If it is determined in step S3109 that it is within the range, it is determined to be normal and the V winning rate error state is not set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3109, or if the process of step S3110 has been executed, this comparison process ends.

Next, the output processing in step S2611 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this embodiment, the result of arithmetic processing and comparison processing performed by the main controller 81 is output to the hall computer of the game hall through the external output terminal 99 connected to the main controller 81 . Although detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, in this embodiment, as the external output terminal 99 from the main control device 81 to the hall computer of the game hall, a terminal indicating whether or not it is in the V error state and a shot number error state a terminal indicating whether or not there is a winning number error state; a terminal indicating whether or not there is a V winning percentage error state; and a terminal indicating whether or not there is a clogged ball state.

In the output process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not there is a V error state. As already explained, the V error state is a state in which a V winning occurs even though the game ball has not passed through the passage areas 412 to 414 of the accessory device 400 . In this case, in step S3202, the output signal to the terminal indicating the V error state is set to the HI state. The output signal is switchable between a HI state and a LOW state such that a HI state indicates a V error state and a LOW state indicates a non-V error state. is set. Note that each output signal described below has the same relationship between the HI state and the LOW state. Moreover, in these output signals, the relationship between the HI state and the LOW state may be reversed.

In step S3202, when the terminal indicating the V error state becomes HI, the hall computer of the game hall can specify that the V error state has occurred. After executing the process of step S3202, a game stop process is executed in step S3203. In the game stop processing, processing such as stopping the shooting of game balls, stopping the payout of game balls, etc. is performed to stop the progress of the game. After executing the process of step S3202, the output process ends. For example, when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress at the timing when the game stop processing is executed, the game state (the number of rounds, the number of wins, the number of opening/closing, etc.) at that timing may be stored in the RAM 114 . In this way, when restarting the game, it is possible to continue the game from the stopped state. In this case, the manager of the game hall should be able to select whether to continue the game from the stopped state or restart the game from the normal game state (from the initialized state). For example, by operating the RAM clear switch provided in the main control device 81 to turn the power ON/OFF, the game state can be initialized and resumed, while the power can be turned ON without simply operating the RAM clear switch. When /OFF, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it can continue from the state at the time of stop.

If it is not in the V error state in step S3202, the output signal to the terminal indicating the V error state is set to the LOW state in step S3204. If the output signal is in the LOW state before the process of step S3204, that state is maintained. The same applies to the processing related to setting the states of other output signals.

After executing the process of step S3204, it progresses to step S3205. In step S3205, it is determined whether or not the V prize number counter is "3" as a predetermined number. The predetermined number is the number that triggers the external output, and in this embodiment, the external output is performed every time three game balls enter the V winning opening 182a. This number is arbitrary, and may be less than three or more than three. However, considering the frequency of winnings to the V winning opening 182a, if the number is too high, the output opportunity may not occur easily. is preferred. The output timing may be determined by an internal timer counter of the MPU 112, a predetermined clock circuit, or the like. If the number is less than 3 in step S3205, the output processing ends. On the other hand, if the number is 3, a process of clearing the V winning number counter is performed in step S3206. This makes it possible to prepare for the next external output opportunity.

In the subsequent step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a shot number error state. If it is in the shot count error state, the output signal to the terminal indicating the shot count error state is set to HI in step S3208. Set the output signal to the LOW state. In step S3208, the terminal indicating the shot count error state becomes HI, so that the hall computer of the game hall can specify that the shot count error state has occurred.

After the processing of step S3208 or step S3209 is executed, it is determined whether or not there is a winning number error state in step S3210. If it is in the winning number error state, the output signal to the terminal indicating the winning number error state is set to the HI state in step S3211, and if it is not in the winning number error state, the output signal to the same terminal is set in step S3212. to the LOW state. In step S3211, when the terminal indicating the winning number error state becomes HI, the hall computer of the game hall can specify that the winning number error state has occurred.

After executing the process of step S3211 or step S3212, it is determined whether or not the V winning rate error state exists in step S3213. If it is in the V winning rate error state, the output signal for the terminal indicating the V winning rate error state is set to HI in step S3214, and if it is not in the V winning rate error state, the same terminal is set in step S3215. to the LOW state. When the terminal indicating the V winning rate error state becomes HI in step S3214, the hall computer of the game hall can specify that the V winning rate error state has occurred.

After performing the process of step S3214 or step S3215, it is determined whether the clogged ball flag is stored in step S3216. If the ball clogging flag is stored and the ball is clogged, the output signal to the terminal indicating the ball clogged state is set to HI in step S3217, and if the ball is not clogged, the process proceeds to step S3218. to set the output signal to the same terminal to the LOW state. After executing the process of step S3217 or step S3218, the output process is terminated. In step S3217, when the terminal indicating the ball clogging state becomes HI, the hall computer of the game hall can specify that the ball clogging state has occurred.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the accessory device 400, the ball distribution unit 185 is distributed to the passage areas 412 to 414 by the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310, and a V prize can be generated. It was configured to be able to grasp the passing information of As a result, it is possible to grasp information such as what kind of route a V prize was taken, information on a route that is likely to lead to a V prize, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to identify whether a fraudulent act using the route leading to the V prize is being carried out or the occurrence of an abnormality in the route leading to the V prize. Therefore, it can be used to improve the accuracy of fraud/abnormality detection.

In this case, arithmetic processing is executed using the number of passages in each of the passage areas 412 to 414, and the result of the arithmetic processing is compared with the set value to generate an error state indicating that the number of passages is abnormally biased. The information on whether or not the game is played is output to the outside and notified to the manager of the game hall or the like. Here, in a general gaming machine, when a ball is entered into each ball entry portion such as the V winning opening 182a, the ball entry information is output to the outside. This is set so that when a ball is entered into each ball entry section, including the V winning hole 182a, a privilege such as a prize ball is given to the player, and the prize ball is given. It is for grasping that it was done in a game hall. From the point of view of detection of fraud or abnormality, a sensor (such as a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor) for detecting fraud or abnormality is provided in the ball-entering portion to which such prize balls are awarded. However, as described above, fraud and abnormalities can occur not only in the ball-entering section where prize balls are awarded, but also in the route leading to the ball-entering section. It is believed that the use of transit information will greatly improve the accuracy of detection of fraud and anomalies.

However, compared to the case where fraudulent acts or abnormalities occur directly in the entrance area, when fraud or abnormalities occur in the route leading to the entrance area, it is difficult to identify it. There are many. As a fraudulent act that takes place on the path leading to the ball-entering section, this is not a direct attempt to generate a lottery or a prize ball, but rather a passage route that makes it easy for the ball to enter the ball-entering section. Also, the abnormalities that occur in the path leading to the ball entry part are abnormalities that result in a passing rate that is far from the designed passing rate, and these events are caused by accidental bias This is due to the fact that it is difficult to judge the difference between And if you try to clearly judge the difference from such an accidental bias, it becomes necessary to set more detailed criteria, which not only raises the problem of increasing the processing load, If an erroneous determination is made, it may eventually result in unnecessary confirmation work by the manager of the game hall or the like.

Therefore, instead of making such judgments on the gaming machine side, the gaming machine side collects the judgment materials (information that events that can be considered fraudulent or abnormal, biased information, and various error information). By adopting a configuration for grasping and outputting, and leaving the final judgment to the manager of the game hall, etc., it is possible to suitably discover the occurrence of irregularities and abnormalities from the viewpoint of workability.

In addition, in the configuration that outputs various error information to the game hall computer, when a V error state occurs, it is configured to output the information immediately, and other error states (shooting number error state, winning number error state, V winning rate error state, ball clogged state), the information is output after waiting until the V winning number counter reaches 3. The V error state is a case where a V winning occurs even though the passing areas 412 to 414 have not been passed. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, it is possible to promptly take measures against fraud or abnormality by informing the manager of the game hall immediately.

On the other hand, in other error states (particularly the number-of-shots error state, the number-of-wins error state, and the V-winning rate error state), the relationship between the number of passages in the passage areas 412-414 and other information deviates from the design value. It can be said that it is a state that can be caused by accidental bias. If the configuration is such that the game hall manager or the like is immediately notified of even such a state, the confirmation work of the game hall manager or the like may become complicated. On the other hand, as a game hall, there are circumstances where it is desirable to grasp such a situation, and from the viewpoint of balancing them, output after waiting a predetermined period (period until the V winning number counter reaches 3) It was configured to As a result, it is possible to maintain a balance between the workability of the manager of the game hall and the frequency of confirmation of fraudulent acts and abnormalities.

In addition, as other error states, not only the number-of-shots error state, the number-of-wins error state, and the V winning rate error state, but also the clogged ball state is output after waiting for a predetermined period of time. Unlike other error states, the occurrence of ball clogging is an event in which there is a high possibility that a clear abnormality has occurred, rather than a deviation from the design value. On the other hand, the occurrence of ball clogging is a matter that can be visually confirmed. Therefore, if the player is in a situation where a ball clogged state can cause a disadvantage to the player (for example, a situation where a ball clog occurs in the back passage area 414, which is a route where V prizes are likely to be won), the player himself/herself can immediately play the game. It is thought that the hall manager or the like is called. In addition, depending on the location of ball clogging, there may be a situation where the game hall side may be disadvantaged (for example, a situation where ball clogging occurs in the left and right passing areas 412 and 413, which are routes where it is difficult to win a V prize), but FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the route that is less likely to win a V prize is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine than the route that is more likely to win a V prize, and can be said to be a location that is easier to visually confirm. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which the game hall side may be disadvantaged due to clogged balls, the manager of the game hall is more likely to notice it than in the case where the player side is in a disadvantageous situation. It can be said. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by setting the output after waiting for a predetermined period of time, the frequency of executing the processing for output (steps S3216 to S3218) is reduced, and the processing load is reduced. is possible.

In addition, the output frequency of the clogged ball state may be different from the output frequency of the shot number error state, the winning number error state, and the V winning rate error state. In this case, the output frequency of the clogged ball state may be set higher than the output frequency of the other shot number error state, winning number error state, and V winning rate error state. More specifically, like the output of the V error state, it may be configured to output immediately when the ball clogging state occurs, or for example, to output at the timing when the V winning number counter is 2 or 1, which is less than 3. may be configured. In this way, even if the manager of the game hall or the like does not notice it visually, it is possible to quickly notify it.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which output frequency differs with the route|route which ball clogging has generate|occur|produced. Specifically, the output frequency regarding the occurrence of ball clogging in the left and right passing areas 412 and 413 is set to be higher than the output frequency in the back passing area 414. may be left to the player's own actions, and may be configured to more quickly output the occurrence of ball clogging on the route where the game hall side may be disadvantaged. From the viewpoint of player protection, contrary to the above, it may be configured to more quickly output the occurrence of ball clogging on a route that may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the output frequency differs depending on the route that triggered each error state. Specifically, the output frequency may be varied depending on which of the passing areas 412 to 414 the error state (shooting number error state, winning number error state, V winning rate error state) is set based on the passing information. . As described above, the back passing area 414 is most likely to lead to V winning, and the left passing area 412 is the least likely to lead to V winning. Errors in area 412 are considered to have the weakest relevance to V wins. Therefore, the output frequency may be set according to the relationship with the V prize, such as increasing the output frequency as the relationship becomes stronger.

Further, the output frequency may be different depending on which error state (shooting number error state, winning number error state, V winning rate error state). Compared with the number-of-shots error state and the number-of-wins error state, the V winning rate error state is more closely related to V winnings, and it is considered highly significant to increase the output frequency of this V winning rate error state.

Passing areas 412 to 414 are set as one path on the upstream side of the V winning opening 182a that triggers the occurrence of a big win. As a result, it is possible to grasp information as to which of the passing areas 412 to 414 the game ball is likely to flow into the V winning opening 182a, that is, whether it is likely to lead to the occurrence of a big win.

Due to the presence of the second distribution member 310 on the upstream side of the passage areas 412 to 414, there is a difference between the design value (set value) of the distribution ratio by the second distribution member 310 and the actual distribution ratio. , it is possible to grasp information such as whether an act of intentionally leading to any of the passing areas 412 to 414 (especially the inner passing area 414) is being performed. In addition, since the passage rate is calculated using the information on the number of winnings to the first working port 38 and the second working port 39, the accessory based on the winning to the first working port 38 and the second working port 39 From the difference between the design value of the winning rate of the device 150 and the actual winning rate, it is possible to grasp information such as whether or not an act of intentionally increasing the winning rate is being performed.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, as an external output from the main control device 81, the error state information is output to the effect control device 82, and the effect control device 82 notifies the error state. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing output processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the processing results of arithmetic processing and comparison processing to the effect control device 82 side. In this embodiment, the output timing of step S3301 is set to occur once an hour, and the internal timer counter of the MPU 112 can grasp the output timing. The details of this output timing will be described later.

In the subsequent step S3302, a process of grasping each passing number counter is executed. In the following step S3303, a process of grasping the number of shots is executed. In the subsequent step S3304, a process of grasping each winning number counter is executed. In other words, in steps S3302 to S3304, data before arithmetic processing is grasped. Note that data may be temporarily stored in the RAM 114 or the like based on the processing in steps S3001, S3003, and S3004, and read out in steps S3302 to S3304.

In the subsequent step S3305, a process of grasping the passing rate with respect to the number of shots is executed. Also, in step S3306, a process of grasping the passing rate for each winning number is executed. Then, in step S3307, a process of grasping the V winning rate for each passing number is executed. The processing of steps S3305 to S3307 can be said to be the processing of reading out the calculation result (calculation result) of the calculation processing. It should be noted that the calculation result of the calculation processing may be temporarily stored in the RAM 114 and read out in steps S3305 to S3307.

In the subsequent step S3308, a process of reading the setting value is executed. In the following step S3309, as a result of comparison between the pass rate for the number of shots and the set value, the presence or absence of a shot number error flag is executed. In the following step S3310, as a result of comparison between the pass rate and the set value for each winning number, a process of grasping the presence or absence of a winning number error flag is executed. In the following step S3311, a process of grasping the presence or absence of a V winning rate error flag is executed as a comparison result between the V winning rate for each passing number and the set value. That is, steps S3308 to S3311 can be said to be processing for grasping the processing result of the comparison processing (FIG. 65).

In the subsequent step S3312, a process of grasping the presence or absence of each clogged ball flag is executed. Then, in step S3313, a process of setting each piece of information grasped in steps S3302 to S3312 to an error command is executed. The error command set in step S3313 is output to the effect control device 82 in subsequent step S3314. After performing the process of step S3214, the output process ends.

Next, error processing when the above error command is received on the effect control device 82 side will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The error process is a process that is started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) by the MPU 142 of the effect control device 82 .

First, at step SB301, it is determined whether or not an error command from main controller 81 has been received. If an error command has been received, it is determined at step SB302 whether or not the received error command contains information on ball clogging. If the ball clogging information is not included, it is determined at step SB303 whether or not the shot number error state information is included. If the information on the number-of-shots error state is not included, it is determined at step SB304 whether or not the information on the number-of-winning-awards error state is included. If the information on the winning number error state is not included, it is determined at step SB305 whether or not the information on the V winning rate error state is included. If it is determined in step SB301 that no error command has been received, the error processing is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in any one of steps SB302 to SB305, the processing relating to the error state after step SB306 is performed. That is, in step SB306, processing for setting the error state is performed. In the error state setting process, a process of storing an error flag indicating an error state in various flag storage areas of the RAM 144 is performed. By storing an error flag on the effect control device 82 side, the effect control device 82 side is also in an error state, which is a state in which it is grasped that various ball jams and various error states have occurred on the main control device 81 side. The setting of the error state is canceled by clearing the error flag. By setting the error state on the effect control device 82 side, special notification for notifying the error state is performed by the effect control device 82 .

In the following step SB307, raw data included in the error command received this time (information grasped in the processing of steps S3302 to S3308 and set in the error command in step S3312) is grasped, and main controller 81 side Regarding the occurrence of various ball clogging and the occurrence of various error states grasped in , the effect control device 82 side also performs collation processing. Such processing is the same as the arithmetic processing (FIG. 64) and the comparison processing (FIG. 65) on the main control device 81 side, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step SB308, it is determined whether or not the collation result on the effect control device 82 side is also the result of an error state that various ball clogging and various error states have occurred. The affirmative determination in step SB308 means that the processing result calculated and compared by the main control device 81 and the processing result calculated and compared by the effect control device 82 side were the same result. In this case, the error state set in step SB306 is maintained, and the error processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB308, it means that the processing result calculated and compared by the main control device 81 and the processing result calculated and compared by the production control device 82 are different results. . In this case, at step SB309, the process for canceling the error state set at step SB306 is executed, and then this error process is terminated. Specifically, processing for erasing the error flag is performed at step SB309. Also, if the information on the V winning rate error state is not included in step SB305 and the error command received this time does not include information on various ball jams and information on various error states, step SB309 will be performed. to clear the error flag. In such processing, if the error flag is not stored, that state is maintained.

In other words, the error state is provisionally set based on the error command from the main controller 81, and officially set by verification based on the raw data included in the error command. In this way, by configuring a double check on the side of the main control device 81 and the side of the effect control device 82, erroneous setting of an error state based on a program error or the like can be avoided.

Here, when an error in the ball clogging or passing rate calculated based on the passing result of the passing area is reported, the manager of the game hall or the like is expected to perform a visual check again. Then, compared to cases where clear fraudulent acts such as magnets and vibrations are being carried out, and cases where it is difficult to continue the game, the accuracy of the notification is more important than the promptness of the notification. considered to be important. Therefore, by adopting the configuration as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress false alarms and lighten the work load of the administrator and the like.

Also, when an error command not containing information about the occurrence of ball clogging or the like is received from the main controller 81, the error state is released. As a result, it is possible to avoid an increase in the workload of the administrator or the like due to the continuation of the error state even though the system has recovered from the error state.

An example of special notification when the effect control device 82 side is set to an error state will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. In this example, as the special notification, the manner of execution of a predetermined notification that is performed when the error state is not set is changed depending on whether the error state is set. As the predetermined notification, an RTC effect (real-time clock effect) performed when the time grasped in the gaming machine has reached the time corresponding to the predetermined effect timing will be described as an example. For example, when a plurality of the same model are installed side by side in a gaming hall where gaming machines are installed, if the RTC effect is generated at the same timing in the plurality of gaming machines installed side by side, each gaming machine will operate as if it were interlocked. It is possible to make a dynamic production as if the

First, the RTC effect processing for performing this RTC effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70(a). The RTC effect processing is a process that is activated by the effect control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

At step SB401, the RTC counter is updated. The RTC counter is a time counter provided in the RAM 144 . In place of or in addition to the configuration in which the production control device 82 has the RTC counter, a predetermined clock circuit for time is provided, and by connecting the clock circuit and the production control device 82, the production control device 82 can set the time may be grasped.

At Step SB402, a process of grasping the value of the RTC counter updated at Step SB401 is performed. Then, at step SB403, based on the information of the RTC counter, it is determined whether or not it is the timing (set time) for performing the RTC effect. If it is the timing to perform the RTC effect, the process for executing the RTC effect is performed in step SB404, and if it is the timing not to perform the RTC effect, the process for the RTC effect is finished as it is.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), in the present embodiment, the timing at which the RTC effect is performed is set to occur once an hour while the game hall is open. More specifically, RTC effects occur at 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, . . . , 22:00. On the other hand, the set time for outputting the error command for which the affirmative determination is made in step S3301 is set to five minutes before the occurrence of the RTC effect. More specifically, the output timing of the error command is set to occur at 9:55, 10:55, 11:55, ..., 21:55.

Next, error notification processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71 as special notification processing when the error state is set. The error notification process is a process started by the effect control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

At step SB501, it is determined by checking the error flag whether or not the error state is set. If the error state is set, it is determined at step SB502 whether or not a delay flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 144 . The delay flag is a flag stored in step SB504 by executing the delay processing in step SB503, which will be described later. If the delay flag is not stored, the RTC rendering is delayed at step SB503. The RTC rendering delay process is a process for delaying the measurement by the RTC counter by a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), and performs a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the predetermined time from the RTC counter. As a result, the RTC effect of the game machine set in the error state is delayed by a predetermined time compared with the RTC effect of the other game machines (the game machine not set in the error state). Become. Then, at step SB504, processing for storing the delay flag in the RAM 144 is performed.

If the error state is not set in step SB501, if the delay flag is stored in step SB502, or after the processing of step SB504 is executed, it is checked in step SB505 whether or not the error state has been recovered. judge. In this determination, if the stored error flag is erased in the error state canceling process at step SB309, affirmative determination is made only once assuming that the error state has been recovered. For example, when erasing the error flag in step SB309, a flag indicating the erasure is stored, and this flag is checked in step SB505. Then, if the flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made at step SB505, and the flag is erased. If the flag is not stored, a negative determination is made at step SB505. When an affirmative determination is made at step SB505, recovery processing of the RTC effect is executed at step SB506. In this processing, processing for restoring the RTC counter delayed by the delay processing in step SB503 is performed. Specifically, a process of adding a value corresponding to a predetermined time to the RTC counter is performed. As a result, the RTC effect is performed at the set original timing. After clearing the delay flag in step SB507, the error notification process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step SB505, the error notification process is terminated.

A manner in which the special notification using the RTC effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

When the error state is not set, as shown in FIG. 72(a), when the timing for performing the RTC effect comes, other machines of the same type installed in the game hall also perform the RTC effect at the same timing. As a result, the same production can be performed in the entire island facility where the same model is installed, so that an integrated production can be achieved, resulting in a more dynamic production.

When the gaming machine is set to the error state, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the gaming machine set to the error state does not generate the RTC effect even at the timing of performing the RTC effect. In other words, the RTC effect is performed on the gaming machines other than the gaming machines set in the error state. As a result, the manager or the like of the gaming hall can recognize that the gaming machine is in an error state due to the fact that the RTC effect is not being performed.

Here, as a configuration for notifying an error state in the game machine, notification by warning display by the error display unit or by warning sound from the speaker unit 64 is also conceivable. The warning display by the error display unit and the warning sound from the speaker unit 64 include notification when a fraudulent act or malfunction of the game machine occurs. This processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The flowchart of FIG. 73( a ) shows fraud detection processing executed by the main controller 81 at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle).

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a magnetic force is detected by a magnetic force detection sensor provided in the game machine. The magnetic force detection sensor is capable of detecting that a magnetic force is added in order to detect an act of guiding a game ball with a magnet to a predetermined ball entry portion (V winning opening 182a, etc.). If the magnetic force is not detected, in step S3302, it is determined whether or not vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor provided in the game machine. The vibration detection sensor is capable of detecting vibration in order to detect an act of intentionally winning a prize in a predetermined ball-entering section (V winning opening 182a, etc.) by changing the flow-down mode of the game ball by vibration. . If vibration is not detected, it is determined in step S3403 whether the front door frame 14 and inner frame 13 are open. If these doors 13 and 14 are not in the open state, the fraud detection processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S3401 to S3403, in step S3404, after executing a process of outputting an illegal command to the effect control device 82, the illegality detection process is terminated.

The flowchart of FIG.73(b) has shown the fraud notification process performed with the production|presentation control apparatus 82 with a predetermined period (2msec period).

First, at Step SB601, it is determined whether or not the illegal command has been received. If no illegal command has been received, the illegal reporting process is terminated. If an illegal command has been received, the warning notification process is executed in step SB602, and then the illegality notification process is terminated. The warning notification process is, as described above, a process for causing the error display section and the speaker section 64 to perform warning notification.

That is, the warning notification is promptly executed when the fraudulent act or the like is detected. On the other hand, the occurrence of ball clogging and the occurrence of an error state of the winning rate based on the detection result of the passing area are only possibilities. It does not detect fraudulent behavior that makes it easier to commit fraud. Therefore, if a warning display or a warning sound is simply issued, there is a possibility that the notice will be issued to a player who is playing a legitimate game. Therefore, it is considered preferable that the notification of the error state be an inconspicuous notification such as warning display or warning sound. On the other hand, due to the diversification and sophistication of presentations on gaming machines, simple display and sound error notifications are buried in the presentations of other gaming machines and other presentations of the relevant gaming machine. A user may miss an error condition.

Therefore, as described above, by intentionally shifting the execution timing of the RTC effect that is performed at the same timing in other gaming machines, it is possible to easily detect that some kind of inconvenience has occurred in the gaming machine whose timing has been shifted. It is possible to comprehend. In particular, in a situation where all gaming machines normally perform a uniform effect, since it is a configuration that does not perform that effect, the effect of other game machines is used to make the game machine that is not performing stand out. It is also possible to attract the attention of the manager of the game hall with a simple configuration. Further, since the RTC effect itself is configured to be performed with the execution timing shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity as compared with a configuration in which the RTC effect is not performed. This is because it is conceivable that the deviation of the RTC effect may also occur due to the deviation of the power-on timing, the update deviation of the internal clock circuit, or the like. In addition, since the game machine only shifts the execution timing of the original effects, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the effects for notifying the error state.

As a result, the manager or the like of the game hall can grasp that some kind of error has occurred based on the detection result of the passage area, so that the manager or the like can visually check. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately grasp errors such as clogged balls and winning percentages, and to perform processing corresponding thereto.

The notification in the case of being set to the V error state shown in the twelfth embodiment (the state in which the V prize has occurred even though none of the passing areas 412 to 414 has been passed) is also a prompt notification. From the viewpoint of necessity, it is preferable to have a configuration in which warning notification is performed in the fraud notification process.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As the notification using the passage information of the passage areas 412 to 414, the effect control device 82 performs the notification regarding the error state. As a result, not only the manager of the game hall but also the player himself/herself can clearly grasp that the error state has been set.

While performing an error notification based on the setting of each error state, the configuration is such that the game stop state is not set. This is because the abnormal bias in the number of passages is merely a possibility of fraudulent activity, and even if the game is to be stopped, it should be confirmed by the manager of the game hall. . In addition, the fraud notification (Fig. 73), which notifies that a fraudulent act has been committed, is more flashy than the error notification and is intended to attract the attention of the manager of the gaming hall. By notifying the player of the state in which confirmation is required for each stage, the confirmation work of the player is facilitated.

The comparison processing is configured to be performed on both the main control device 81 side and the effect control device 82 side. As a result, the possibility of erroneous detection due to program errors or the like can be reduced as much as possible. In particular, as described above, the error notification can be confirmed by the manager of the game hall, and the correct state can be grasped, and if the error is notified by mistake, the confirmation work may increase accordingly.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs a comparison process on one side of the main control device 81 or the production|presentation control device 82 instead of the structure which double-checks by the main control device 81 and the production|presentation control device 82 as mentioned above. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load. In particular, if the effect control device 82 side performs the comparison processing, it is possible to disperse the processing load with the main control device 81 side that performs the arithmetic processing.

When an error is reported, the execution timing of the RTC presentation is delayed. As a result, it is possible to highlight that an abnormality has occurred in the game machine by using the RTC effect performed in another game machine.

The timing of error notification, ie, the timing of outputting an error command, is set in accordance with the timing of RTC presentation. More specifically, since the error command is output a predetermined time (5 minutes) before the RTC effect is performed, when the RTC effect is performed by the effect control device 82, the error command is output before the predetermined time. Receiving status can be secured. As a result, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which an error notification is not made for a long time even though the error state has been set.

In addition, regarding the error notification, it is configured to set different error states depending on the trigger of the error state (either one of the error state of the number of shots, the number of winning prizes, the V prize rate error, and the clogged ball state, or the passage areas 412 to 414). good too. In this case, it is preferable that the special notification of the error state is also changed according to the trigger of the error state. Specifically, the clogged ball state is considered to have a higher urgency for notification than other error states, and in that respect, the notification of the error state based on the clogged ball state is not the delay of the RTC effect, but the warning notification. It is good also as information performed each time like. In addition, since the V winning rate error state is more closely related to the V winning than the shot number error state and the winning number error state, error notification is provided so that the strength of the relationship with these V winnings can be clearly recognized. may be made different (differentiated delay timings, etc.).

In addition, as described above, the strength of the relationship with the V prize is different depending on the passing areas 412 to 414, and it is also possible to configure the content of the error notification to be different depending on the passing areas 412 to 414 that trigger the error state. good.

Also, the error notification using the RTC effect may be limited to notification of the clogged ball state. That is, the shot number error state, winning number error state, and V winning rate error state are externally output to the game hall computer as in the twelfth embodiment, and are left to the judgment of the manager of the game hall. Abnormalities that are relatively easy to identify, such as the occurrence of a state, may be notified by an RTC presentation. Then, as in a V error state (a state in which a V prize is won even though the game has not passed through the passage areas 412 to 414), the game is stopped or a warning is issued for obvious irregularities or abnormalities. In this way, by making the processing different according to the type of error, it is possible to take appropriate measures according to the type of error.

In the case where a clogged ball state occurs, for example, when the clogged ball state is left for a predetermined period (the manager of the game hall or the like is not called), a notification may be made. . As described above, the occurrence of a clogged ball state is an event that can be visually confirmed by the player. In this case, an event that the player has already recognized will be reported, and the player will not feel uncomfortable. Conceivable. In this case, if the RTC effect is delayed from the viewpoint of generating a loss in the effect rather than directly contributing to the profit of the player, it is possible to notify an event that is not caused by the action of the player, such as a clogged ball. , it becomes possible to notify while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In the output process, in addition to the configuration of outputting an error command to the effect control device 82 side, it may also be configured to output information to the game hall via the external output terminal 99 shown in the twelfth embodiment. .

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, execution of arithmetic processing and comparison processing of the passing areas 412 to 414 may be restricted. FIG. 74(a) is a flow chart showing the passing area processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, normal passing area processing is executed in step S3502. The processing in step S3502 is the same as the processing in FIG. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the passing area processing ends without performing the processing of step S3502.

That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing accessory 168 becomes open more frequently, and winning of the accessory device 400 is more likely to occur. When the winning to the accessory device 400 is likely to occur, the passage rate of the passage areas 412 to 414 is also improved. Therefore, when the normal game state before the opening/closing execution mode is compared with the opening/closing execution mode, the design value of the passage rate of the passage areas 412 to 414 can be greatly different. Therefore, in the open/close execution mode, detection of the passing areas 412 to 414, arithmetic processing, comparison processing, etc. are not performed, so that the passing rate during the normal game state can be preferably calculated and compared. Become.

This embodiment can also be modified as shown in FIG. 74(b). Specifically, if it is determined in step S3601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, normal pass area processing is executed in step S3602, and then this pass area processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the passage area processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S3603, and then the present passage area processing ends. In this modification, the winning number counter, passage flag, etc. are set for the open/close execution mode separately from those during the normal game state. is used to perform the same processing as the normal passing region processing.

That is, the passage rate and V winning rate for the open/close execution mode are calculated, compared, etc. separately from the passing rate and V winning rate in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately grasp the occurrence of various errors even in the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning frequency increases. In particular, in the open/close execution mode, since a large number of game balls enter the accessory device 400, the set value that is the criterion for determining the winning number error state, the shot number error state, and the V winning rate error state is the normal game. It can be different from the one in the state, and the occurrence of ball clogging increases. Furthermore, there is a high possibility that a game ball will be led to the V winning opening 182a along an intended path by being mixed in with a large number of entering balls. Therefore, according to the modified example, even in the open/close execution mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the manager of the game hall or the like of the occurrence of various errors.

In addition, in the above modification, it is preferable to separately provide design values for the passing rate and the V winning rate during the open/close execution mode.

For example, as shown in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the 16R continuous mode and the continuous variation mode are set as the opening/closing execution modes (see FIG. 11), the types of opening/closing execution modes It is also possible to set whether or not the detection and arithmetic processing of the passing areas 412 to 414 are performed according to the conditions, or to change the judgment criteria for the error state when the detection and arithmetic processing are performed. Here, the 16R continuation mode is an opening and closing execution mode in which V winning is likely to occur in any round and the round is easy to continue. is. In other words, especially in the rounds in which the V winnings in the continuous variation mode are difficult to occur, the key to the game is how to generate the V winnings and continue the round. It is thought that this is an attempt to improve the V winning rate in rounds in which V winning is less likely to occur. In that respect, for example, at least in the opening and closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode as the opening and closing execution mode, if the passage areas 412 to 414 are detected and arithmetic processing is performed, it will be possible to fraudulently increase the V winning rate as described above. It becomes possible to specify the action. Also, from that point of view, at least in the rounds (8R, 11R, see FIG. 27) in which the V winning rate is low in the opening and closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode, the passage areas 412 to 414 may be detected and arithmetic processing may be performed. .

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to win a prize to the accessory device 150 based on the winning to the operation openings 38 and 39, and when the winning game ball further wins to the V winning opening 182a, the opening and closing execution mode is performed. , the motion of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed by the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201, but the motion of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed to The configuration to be changed is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration that does not include at least one of the distribution members 300 and 310 or a configuration that does not include the rotating body 201 may be used. In short, in a structure in which the winning game balls in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the V winning opening 182a or the exit opening 182b, it is sufficient that the distribution is distributed by a distribution section that performs a predetermined operation. .

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, as a configuration for changing the winning timing to the accessory device 150, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing accessory 168 is changed. It is sufficient if it is possible to change the subsequent V winning rate by changing, and the V winning rate is changed by changing the operation pattern of other roles instead of the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing role 168. may be configured. However, if the other role product is set as the role product in the role product device 150, an event may occur in which V wins are not won due to a change in the movement pattern of the other role product even though the prize has been won in the role product device 150. Therefore, it may give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, it is preferable that the above-mentioned other accessory is something outside the accessory device 150 that changes the winning timing of the accessory device 150 .

(3) The start of operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, but other timing may be used as long as a predetermined specific event (predetermined event) occurs. . That is, it may be the start timing of the round game, the opening or closing of the opening/closing accessory 168, or the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the round game.

(4) In the first embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, the 8th round is set to the opening/closing pattern B, the 11th round is set to the opening/closing pattern C, and the continuation rate is low in these rounds. The configuration of the opening and closing pattern of each round is not limited to the above. For example, all rounds after a predetermined round such as the 8th round may be low continuation rounds such as opening and closing pattern B, or all rounds up to a predetermined round are low continuation rounds, and high continuation rounds are performed after the predetermined round. It may be round (opening/closing pattern A). Also, an opening/closing pattern that is easier to continue than opening/closing pattern A (higher V winning probability) or an opening/closing pattern that is harder to continue than B or C (lower V winning probability) may be set. By including the rounds of these opening/closing patterns in the opening/closing pattern of each round, the opening/closing patterns can be diversified.

Further, the opening/closing patterns of all rounds may be configured to be opening/closing patterns that are difficult to continue (opening/closing patterns B and C). In this case, all the rounds may be the opening/closing pattern B, all the rounds may be the opening/closing pattern C, an opening/closing pattern which is more difficult to continue than the opening/closing patterns B and C, or a combination thereof. good.

Furthermore, conversely, the opening/closing pattern of all rounds may be an opening/closing pattern (opening/closing pattern A) that is easy to continue.

It should be noted that the opening/closing execution mode constituted by each of the opening/closing patterns described above may be changed to the opening/closing execution mode of the continuity rate variation mode in the first embodiment. may be added, or each opening/closing execution mode may be combined and added to the first embodiment.

(5) In the above-described second embodiment, by changing the pattern of opening and closing twice (opening and closing based on the winning of the second operation opening 39), the V winning probability is changed. The pattern may be changed, and the number of times of opening and closing may be changed. For example, in a configuration that changes the opening/closing pattern for one time, the opening time is set so that the normal opening result is an operation pattern that is difficult to be distributed to the V winning side by the distribution members 300 and 310, and a predetermined result is obtained. Then, without changing the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310, the opening time of the opening and closing accessory may be changed so that it is easily distributed to the V winning side.

(6) As a configuration for changing the V winning probability (changing the opening/closing pattern) according to the game result as in the second embodiment, the result of the change (special opening A result or special opening B result) depending on the game state may have different probabilities.

(7) As a configuration for changing the V winning probability by changing the opening/closing pattern, the configuration for improving the V winning probability has been described in detail, but it may be configured to lower the V winning probability.

(8) Even if the distribution members 300 and 310 are not provided, the opening/closing pattern may be provided so that if the accessory device 150 wins, the prize is almost V (distributed to the V winning side) by making the opening/closing pattern different. good. In this case, it is preferable to determine the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 by grasping the rotational position of the rotating body 201 . Also in this configuration, the V winning probability can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201 .

(9) As a configuration for changing the V winning probability by grasping the rotational position of the rotating body 201 and changing the opening/closing pattern, for example, the following configuration is conceivable.

As a game result (result table) based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, a special opening C result capable of changing the opening/closing pattern is provided. When the special opening C result is obtained, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped based on the detection result of the rotational position detection sensor 196 . For example, when a game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 is not distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, the period until it is drawn out from the lead-out portion 186 to the recessed portion 182 (ball guide portion 202) is defined as the reaching period. Then, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship between the arrival period and the period during which the V winning opening guide portion 204 rotates to the position corresponding to the lead-out portion 186 . By doing so, it is possible to set a pattern in which the V prize is likely to occur when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201 .

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, it takes about 0.3 seconds for the game ball that has won the prize device 150 to reach the position to be distributed by the second distribution member 310. Although the path length is set so that it takes about 0.2 sec from the position on the side of the second distribution member 310 to reach the position to be distributed by 300, this structure may be changed. Also, as described above, the probability of being distributed to the outside side due to the relationship between the period in which the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open and closed state and the period in which each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is in the distribution state Alternatively, it is possible to change the probability of being distributed to the V winning side.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the types of support by the electric accessory 39a are set so as not to differ, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the types of support differ. Specifically, for example, as a support mode, when compared in a situation where game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area, the electric accessory 39a of the second operation opening 39 opens per unit period. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period (i.e., One display duration in the character object display section 44) is set to be short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 39 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 will be in the open state also increases, and the probability of winning the V prize (occurrence of a big win) also increases. In addition, as in the second embodiment, in the configuration in which not only the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 but also the game result (jackpot type) is different between the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, In the mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of winning the second operation port 39 increases, the game result (jackpot type, special opening A, B in the second embodiment) set for the second operation port 39 is obtained. higher probability. Furthermore, if the winning to the second operation port 39 occurs frequently, the accompanying prize balls can also be obtained frequently, and the player should not reduce the number of balls held during this high frequency support mode. The game can be played while the In this way, the level of the support mode can be used to change the degree of advantage, thereby diversifying the game.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit period is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, after one electric accessory open lottery is performed, the securing period secured when the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 41 In a configuration where multiple types of variable display periods are prepared, in high-frequency support mode, a shorter secured period is more likely to be selected than in low-frequency support mode, or the average secured period is set to be shorter. may have been Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the secured period secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average period of the securing period and increasing the winning probability. .

(12) In the above-described second embodiment, the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are provided with different result tables for game results, so that the degree of advantage is increased or decreased. The same result table may be used as in the embodiment. Specifically, a special opening A result and a special opening B result may be provided in the result table for the first working port. In this case, even though the first operation port 38 is won, the opening is actually performed twice, so the player feels that he/she has gained a profit. Since V winning probability increases, even if it is difficult to win a prize to the second operation opening 39, it is expected that a prize to the first operation opening 38 side will result in a special opening A result, etc. becomes possible.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the description is based on the assumption that pending information is acquired based on winnings to the respective operation ports 38 and 39, and the pending information is stored with a predetermined number (four for each) as the upper limit. However, the configuration may be such that the pending information is not stored. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration. However, in the configuration in which the pending information is not stored as described above, for example, during the control of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 occurs again. Although the opening and closing accessories 168 are not opened even though the operation ports 38 and 39 have been won, the player may feel that he/she has lost money, and his/her interest in the game is decreased. I can't help it. Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to win not only the accessory device 150 but also the operation ports 38 and 39 during the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, in the configuration on the side where the pending information is stored, if that amount of pending information is digested after the opening/closing execution mode, and V prize is generated by opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 168 accompanying the digestion of the pending information, the opening/closing is performed. The execution modes will be consecutive. As a result, the game can be played on the premise of the occurrence of the consecutive villas, and the amusement of the game can be improved. However, in a predetermined state, for example, during the control of the accessory device 150 or when a prize is won in the operation openings 38 and 39 during the opening/closing execution mode, the configuration is such that the pending information is acquired. may be configured not to acquire hold information. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of loss when a prize is awarded to the operation openings 38 and 39 during the control of the accessory device 150 or during the opening/closing execution mode as described above. .

Further, the game result of the hold information obtained during the above-described predetermined state may easily be a special opening A result or a special opening B result. Generally, the player expects to win a prize for the opening/closing role 168 while the opening/closing role 168 is open. Then, if it is configured to acquire the reservation information as described above when the opening and closing role 168 is not won during the opening of the opening and closing role 168, even if the opening and closing role 168 is not won It can be made to expect that it wins to the operation openings 38 and 39 even if it does. In addition, if the game result based on the winning is set as the special opening A result or the special opening B result (result of the opening/closing pattern in which V winning is likely to occur) as described above, the opening/closing role during the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 It is possible to create a novel game in which the player expects to win prizes not only on the side of the object 168 but also on the operation ports 38 and 39.例文帳に追加By doing so, it is possible to further improve interest.

(14) In the above embodiment, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing accessory 168 is changed, such as the opening and closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, special opening A result, and special opening B result. Although the configuration is such that the V winning probability is changed without changing the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 in the device 150, these opening/closing patterns and the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 are only examples. There may be a configuration in which the V winning probability is changed by a combination of other patterns.

(15) In the above-described second embodiment, the V winning probability is set without making the first opening start timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in the special opening A result or the special opening B result different from that in other cases (normal opening result). is changed, it is also possible to change the V winning probability by changing the first opening start timing. In this case, for example, in the case of the special opening A result or the special opening B result, regardless of the opening type counter CS, the opening timing according to the operation pattern of each driving unit 300, 310, 201 in the accessory device 150 is set. It is good also as a structure which sets. If this release timing is notified by, for example, the symbol display device 51 or the like (character display such as "Let me win in XX seconds!"), it is possible to further increase attention to the game. On the other hand, if the opening timing is not notified (only the result of special opening A or B, such as "If you win, chance!"), it is possible to suppress target shooting, and V winning according to the skill level of the player. The fairness of the game can be ensured by eliminating the high and low rates.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 81 includes detection means (sensors) for detecting fraudulent activity and means for executing corresponding processing based on the detection results (for example, regular added as one process within the process). In particular, in the above-described embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode is started by the V winning to the accessory device 150, and the round game can be continued by the V winning. is assumed. For example, this action can be caused by magnetism, radio waves, or vibrations, and a detection sensor is provided to detect these (magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc.), and based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the progress of the game is stopped. , notification, and further notification to the game hall (external output). In addition, in the above-described second embodiment, since the opening/closing pattern is set to increase the V winning probability, the opening/closing pattern, that is, the winning to the second operation opening 39 (detection of the sensor 39c) is illegal. or by reading the update period of the jackpot random number counter C1 in some way, the winning to the second operation opening 39 (detection of the sensor 39c) is illegal at the timing where the special opening A result or special opening B result is likely to occur It is also assumed that the act of causing That is, by providing a configuration (detection sensors for magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc. and means for performing processing based on the detection results) that suppresses acts that illegally generate opening and closing patterns that increase the probability of winning a V prize like these While increasing the probability of winning a prize and improving interest, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally generating it.

(17) As in each of the above embodiments, in the case of a configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided, the configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 themselves are not provided. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, when a V winning occurs in the opening/closing control during the normal game state, a V winning flag is set (step S1104), the opening/closing control is terminated, and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. is started, however, the opening/closing control may be continued even if V winning occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to win a prize to the accessory device 150 even after the V prize is won during the opening/closing control. is likely to be obtained), but since the V prize has occurred, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the player cannot win the prize to the role product device 150 and makes the player feel that he or she has lost. On the other hand, when V winning occurs, the timing of V winning and the timing of occurrence of opening and closing execution mode are closer to each other in the case of immediately notifying it and shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. It becomes clear whether the V prize is generated by the ball and the game has shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation mode of the game ball. Therefore, in order to solve these contradictory problems, for example, by grasping the operation patterns of the rotating body 201 and the distribution members 300 and 310, the winning of the accessory device 150 can be achieved in the opening/closing control based on one piece of reserved information. The opening/closing pattern may be set so that the V winning rate is higher when the V winning rate occurs later (second timing) than when it occurs earlier (first timing). In this way, the occurrence of the V prize is more likely to occur at a later timing in the first opening/closing control, and after the V prize has occurred, a further prize to the accessory device 150 can occur. It can make itself less likely to occur.

(19) The timing at which V winning occurs may be set in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. More specifically, for example, if the opening/closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is configured to be open for a period (for example, 0.3 sec) shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), Winning to the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur during the period in which the open state is maintained. However, for example, even if a period shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set as the period for maintaining the open state, the game ball may reach the accessory device 150 just in the open state depending on the timing of firing the game ball. You may get (win a prize). Then, if a prize is won in the role product device 150, the V winning rate changes depending on the movement patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the role product device 150, as described above. Therefore, in the opening/closing timing setting process, the firing cycle of the game ball is grasped, and based on the firing cycle, the presence or absence of the winning possibility of the accessory device 150 is grasped, and the V winning rate is changed based on it. It is preferable that the opening/closing pattern is set so as to

(20) The entrance sensor 179 may be provided corresponding to each of the left and right opening/closing accessories 168 . That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the same entrance sensor 179 is used to detect a prize from any of the opening and closing accessories 168 to the accessory device 150. A separate entrance sensor may be configured to detect the winning of a game ball. In this way, when a prize is won in the accessory device 150, it can be detected more quickly. For example, when a prize is won from the winning path on the side where V winning is easier, notification to that effect can be performed. More specifically, in the above embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left side of the guide path 183. For example, the rate of distribution to the left side guide path 183 differs depending on the left and right winning paths. In this case, it is considered that the player will be more interested in winning from the winning route with a higher probability of being allocated to the right guide path 183 . Therefore, if the winning is notified after winning, the player does not have to pay attention to the action of the game ball all the time, and can enjoy the game in a relaxed manner. In such a configuration in which the V winning rate differs depending on the left and right winning paths, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 and By applying the invention of changing the V winning rate by changing the opening/closing pattern, it becomes possible to change the V winning rate more strictly, and diversification of games can be achieved.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, game balls that have been distributed (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 always win V prizes. good too.

(22) As a result of the win/fail judgment (game result), in addition to the normal opening result, the missing result, the direct hit result, the special opening A result and the special opening B result with different opening/closing patterns but the same number of times of opening are provided. but other results may be provided. For example, the results of different opening times (two openings in the results table for the first working port and one opening in the results table for the second working port), or the same number of openings but opening It is also possible to provide a result with a different period for which the state is maintained (a result that is longer than usual, a result that is shorter than usual), or the like. Even if these results are used, the V winning rate can be adjusted from the relationship between the period during which the open state is maintained and the movement patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotor 201 .

(23) In the normal game state, the opening/closing pattern is changed according to the result of winning/failure determination (game result), but the following configuration may be applied. For example, a counter for judging success and a counter for determining the type of game result are provided. Then, in the determination using the counter that determines whether or not the match is made, only whether or not to open the state is determined, and in the determination using the counter that determines the type of game result, the type of opening/closing pattern (that is, the second It is determined whether it is normally open like the form or special open). In this way, the processing configuration of each determination process can be simplified. If it is the structure which reports, it will be sufficient to read only the counter for judging the suitability of the reservation information, and the simplification of the structure regarding pre-reading reporting can also be achieved.

(24) As the reservation information, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the operation openings 38 and 39 are won, and the type of opening/closing execution mode (jackpot type) is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. A configuration may be adopted in which a counter for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode is acquired at the time of V winning, and the type of opening/closing execution mode is determined based on the counter. In this way, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter to be used at the time of the V winning at the time of winning to the operation openings 38 and 39 even though the V winning has not occurred, thus simplifying the processing configuration. can be improved. However, for example, when determining the opening and closing pattern, the configuration reflects the type of opening and closing execution mode at the time of V winning. If there is a configuration such as increasing/lowering the V winning rate, it is preferable to acquire a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode as the pending information. In addition, when opening/closing control is executed or in advance notification, the type of opening/closing execution mode when V wins during opening/closing control corresponding to the hold information is notified (for example, "If you win here, get 16R continuous mode! ! ”, etc.), it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening/closing execution mode is acquired as the pending information.

(25) In each of the above-described embodiments, the open/close execution mode is started by detecting V winning in the winning process in the game control process, but the opening/closing execution mode may be changed as follows. That is, the first round in the opening and closing execution mode is started based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, and in the game control process, whether or not to continue the first round is determined by the presence or absence of V winning. do. In this case, in the first round (RC1) of the opening and closing execution mode based on the winning of the first operating port 38, the round game with one opening number (RC2) is likely to be executed, and the winning of the second operating port 39 In the first round (RC1) of the opening and closing execution mode based on , the configuration is such that a round game with two opening times (RC2) is easily executed. Then, in each opening/closing number of times in the first round of the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are not changed. By varying the opening/closing pattern of the V winning rate, the continuation rate of the round game is varied. Even in this way, it is possible to obtain unique effects from each of the characteristic configurations described above.

(26) In each of the above-described embodiments, the order of execution of the pending information based on the winning of the first operating port 38 and the pending information based on the winning of the second operating port 39 (the order to be judged) Although the pending information based on the winning to the second operation port 39 is configured to be prioritized, the order of acquisition of the pending information may be set. For example, the determination of whether the hold information is valid based on the winning of the second operation opening 39 is more advantageous than the determination of whether the holding information is appropriate based on the winning of the first operation opening 38. can be set) is performed, as a player, there is also a desire to first execute the determination of whether the hold information based on the winning to the second operation opening 39 as in the above-described embodiment, There is also a feeling that I would like to put it off (save the opening and closing pattern that is likely to cause V winning for later) and execute the validity judgment of the reserved information based on the winning to the first operation opening 38 first. By entrusting such a player's wavering feeling to a random order not intended by the player, such as the winning order of the first operation opening 38 and the second operation opening 39, the game is made more diverse. becomes possible.

In addition, if a configuration is applied in which the winning rate to the second operating port 39 is changed using the level of the support mode of the electric accessory 39a, the holding based on the winning to the second operating port 39 as in each of the above embodiments In the configuration in which the determination of whether or not information is given priority, the order of determination of whether or not the pending information is determined based on the winning of the first operation port 38 may continue to be moved down due to the frequent occurrence of the winning of the second operation port 39. , the difference between the winning timing to the first operation port 38 and the timing of determining whether the hold information is valid based on the winning may become large. If the difference between the winning timing and the timing of winning/failing judgment becomes large, for example, even if a fraudulent act such as making a win/fail judgment is performed even though no winning has occurred, the manager of the game hall may It can be difficult to see through. In addition, the delay in discovering the fraudulent act may lead to the inconvenience that the fraudulent act may be more likely to be committed. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which winners are judged in accordance with the winning order as described above, it is possible to minimize the difference between the winning timing and the winning judgment timing, and as a result, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts. Become.

(27) As an example of the configuration in which the upper limit of four is stored as the number of reservations of the reservation information based on the winnings to the operation ports 38 and 39, the number may be less than three, or may be five. There may be more than one, and the upper limit storage number of the pending information based on the winning to each of the operation ports 38 and 39 may be different from each other. For example, each of the operation ports 38 and 39 may be configured to store one piece of hold information. In this way, for example, the possibility of inducing a series of games after the opening/closing execution mode due to too much retention information being accumulated during the opening/closing execution mode is reduced, and the range of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out is reduced, resulting in a mild game. It becomes possible to

(28) The holding light emitting units 54 to 56 may be configured to be displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. FIG. The symbol display device 51 is provided above the accessory device 150, and the player moves the game ball around the accessory device 150, such as winning the accessory device 150 and then winning the V prize. It is considered that the person is highly interested in the mode, and if the number of pending information is displayed in a place (that is, the display screen G) near the place where such interest is given, it will naturally come into view. it is conceivable that. In this way, information can be consolidated and the game can be made easier to understand, compared to a configuration in which separate notifications are made using various locations. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the type (15R continuous mode, continuous variation mode) is notified on the display screen G, and the pending number is notified on the display screen G. With this configuration, when notifying the type of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the information on the reserved number is deleted, or the type of the opening/closing execution mode is notified while the information on the reserved number is left. In the former case, when the type of open/close execution mode is being notified, even if you try to check the number of pending information, you may not be able to do so. Therefore, the notification of the type of opening/closing execution mode itself may be plain. Therefore, for example, if the display screen G is configured to display the number of pending information even while having the pending light emitting units 54 to 56, even if the display of the number of pending information is erased on the display screen G, at that time can be confirmed by the holding light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed in accordance with the timing.

(29) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the game control process, if it is in the role product control state, the subsequent hold information is not digested, but it may be changed as follows. That is, during the accessory control state, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the accessory device 150, and whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V winning sensor 192 or the missing sensor 193, That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 is still present in the accessory device 150. If it is present in the accessory device 150, the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed and the accessory is closed. Even if the control state is terminated, the following pending information is not digested. In this way, the player will be more conscious of watching the winning of each accessory device 150 with more care, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

(30) In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening/closing execution mode is entered based on the occurrence of a V prize to the accessory device 150, and in the opening/closing execution mode, winning of the accessory device 150 is likely to occur. However, the opening/closing execution mode may be executed by another winning device. For example, by providing a variable ball entry device capable of displacing between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a ball, V to the accessory device 150 The main controller 81 controls the variable ball entry device to be in the open state based on the occurrence of a prize or the like. Then, the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode may be executed by the variable winning device, or the opening/closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode may be executed by the variable winning device. In the former case, in the continuous variation mode, the open/close pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is varied in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments to vary the V winning rate in the accessory device 150, thereby adjusting the continuation rate of the round game. Is possible. In the latter case, the variable ball entry device is provided with a V winning opening and a non-winning opening, and a distributing section for distributing the winning to each winning opening is provided upstream of each of these winning openings. The distributing part is operated in a predetermined operation pattern to distribute the game balls that have entered the variable prize winning device to the V prize winning opening and the non-winning winning opening. Then, as a continuous variation mode, the switching timing between the open state and the closed state is changed so as to change the winning timing to the variable winning device without changing the operation pattern of the distribution part, and the V winning port is opened. to adjust the winning rate of In this way, instead of or in addition to the configuration of changing the continuation rate of the round game in the accessory device 150, it is also possible to realize it by another winning device.

(31) The game ball that has been V-distributed by the second distribution member 310 is led out to the warp passage 250 as a region where the visibility from the front of the game machine is lower than that. A V winning may be generated by passing through an area where the visibility from the front does not change, or a V winning may be generated by passing through an area where the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is improved. In this way, not only the visibility of the game ball is reduced, but also the fact that the V distribution has been performed can be easily confirmed by the subsequent operation mode of the game ball. In particular, in a configuration such as the pachinko machine 10 where the greatest attention is focused on whether or not a V prize is generated, it is easier to raise the level of attention by highlighting the fact that the V allocation has been performed. It is considered to be Therefore, if the visibility from the front of the game machine does not decrease (does not change/improves) at the time of V distribution as in the above configuration, the subsequent motion of the game ball can be fully recognized. It is preferable to raise the degree of attention.

However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the act of aiming to intentionally cause V distribution, the visibility of the game ball after V distribution is performed and the location where V distribution is performed ( It is preferable not to excessively enhance the visibility of the area where the second distribution member 310 is provided.

In this regard, in each of the above-described embodiments, V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310, which has relatively low visibility from the front of the game machine, and V distribution is performed by the first distribution member 300, which has relatively high visibility from the front of the game machine. Since the V winning rate is changed by combining the operation patterns of the distributing members 300 and 310, the first distributing member 300 eliminates the inconvenience caused by the deterioration of the visibility from the front of the game machine. In addition, the inconvenience caused by the improved visibility from the front of the game machine is covered by the second distribution member 310. It's becoming

(32) A game ball that has won a prize in the role product device 150 is discharged to the outside of the role product device 150 through the V winning passage 191a or the exit passage 191b, and the discharged game ball passes through a discharge passage (not shown) to the pachinko machine. 10, but may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device 150. FIG.

(33) By changing the opening/closing standby time and the variable display time of the game cycle, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 can be operated from the time of digestion of the reserved information or the end of the opening/closing execution mode as the occurrence of a predetermined event. The V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is changed without changing the operation pattern. The V winning rate can be increased by applying the configuration that varies the period in which is maintained, and the configuration that changes the waiting time between the first and second open states and the open state, individually or in combination. It is good also as a structure which changes.

(34) In the ninth embodiment, the larger the common pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation display time. As a result, overlap with V allocation is likely to occur, but the timing at which V allocation is performed may be set later so that the longer the fluctuation display time, the more likely overlap with the V distribution occurs. In this case, the larger the common number CRN of reservations, the longer the variable display time. A configuration may be adopted in which overlap with minutes is likely to occur.

(35) In the ninth embodiment, the variable display time is set according to the common reservation number CRN regardless of the game state. Other modes may be set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), as the jackpot type, in addition to the 16R continuous mode and continuous fluctuation mode in each of the above embodiments, a jackpot result that shifts to the opening and closing execution mode of the 2R continuous mode is set. . The opening/closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode is an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is performed only twice (or only once). shall be terminated. Therefore, it is assumed that the opening/closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode will yield fewer prize balls than the other opening/closing execution modes.

FIG. 54(b) is a flow chart showing the variable display time setting process of this modified example. The variable display time setting process is a process executed in step S1706 of the game control process (FIG. 45).

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the special mode. The special mode is a mode that is set when the previous opening/closing execution mode is the 2R continuation mode, and is set in the opening/closing execution mode termination process (step S1215) in the game state transition process (FIG. 23). be done. If the current gaming state is not the special mode, a process of setting a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 sec) as the variable display time is executed in step S2202, and this setting process is terminated. In this case, V distribution may occur if winning to the role device 150 occurs immediately after the start of the opening operation of the opening and closing accessory 168, but V distribution does not occur otherwise.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the special mode, the variable display time (see FIG. 46(a)) corresponding to the common reservation number CRN is set in step S2203, and then this setting process is terminated. As already explained, the larger the common reservation number CRN is, the more likely the V allocation is to occur, and thus the variable display time can be selected. Since the common pending number CRN tends to increase during the opening/closing execution mode (holding information tends to accumulate), setting the special mode increases the occurrence rate of the opening/closing execution mode.

In this way, even after the opening/closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode, which is not advantageous for the player, it becomes easier to shift to the opening/closing execution mode after that, and the unfavorable amount can be compensated.

In the above configuration, in the 2R continuation mode, even if V winning occurs during the round game, the round game may be continued until the winning upper limit number is reached. By doing so, the common reservation number CRN tends to increase during the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to anticipate the number of consecutive houses after the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, in the above configuration, a distribution table for each mode may be provided so that the 2R continuation mode is likely to be selected in the V prize (occurrence of a big win) in the special mode. By doing so, it is possible to create a new game in which the 2R continuation mode with few balls is played endlessly, and as a result, many balls can be obtained.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, if, for example, the electric accessory 39a is set to be in a supported state during the special mode, the common reservation number CRN is likely to accumulate, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode can be expected to continue.

(36) The types of jackpots described in the above embodiments and the like are examples, and other types of jackpots may be provided. For example, even in the 2R continuous mode, the upper limit of the number of rounds may be set in the continuous variation mode so that it will end in one round if the V prize does not occur in the first round. A configuration in which the selectivity of the opening/closing pattern differs depending on the round may be adopted. For example, a 5R continuous variation mode jackpot is provided with the upper limit of the number of rounds in the continuous variation mode being 5 rounds, and a 5R continuous variation mode A in which the opening and closing pattern A with a high round continuation rate is likely to be selected in each round, and each round A 5R continuous variation mode B in which the open/close pattern B with a low round continuation rate is likely to be selected may be provided.

(37) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the hold information is consumed, the game state shifts to the accessory control state or the game round is started, so the game state shifts from the previous game state to a predetermined game state. It can be said that the game state is changed from the previous game state to a predetermined game state based on the fact that the reservation information is digested and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started as a result of the decision. It can be said that the game state has shifted, and based on the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it can be said that the game state has shifted from the previous game state to a predetermined game state.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, the opening/closing accessory 168 may be configured to perform a predetermined operation when the hold information is digested, that is, at the start of the waiting time for opening or the start of the game cycle. . The predetermined action is, for example, an action suggesting that the game ball cannot enter the accessory device 150, but moves slightly from the closed state to the open state side to enter the open state. Conceivable.

(39) Each of the above inventions can also be applied to the following configurations. That is, in the game board 24, unit switching control (so-called round game) is provided. Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the lottery based on the winning to one of the operation ports 38, 39 is a jackpot result, and the fact that it is notified by a predetermined notification unit). As a state advantageous to the player, the variable ball entry device is shifted to a special game state (so-called jackpot state) in which the unit switching control is performed a plurality of times. In addition, in the variable ball entry device, a distribution that determines whether a game ball that has entered the device is passed through a first passing portion (for example, V zone) or a second passing portion (normal zone) different from it. Install equipment. In the special game state, it is configured to be able to shift to the next unit switching control on the condition that it has passed through the first passing portion during one unit switching control. Even in such a configuration, if the switching timing in the unit switching control is changed, the passing rate to the first passing section side (that is, the continuation of the unit switching control rate) can be varied. In this way, for example, while notifying the upper limit of the number of times unit switching control is performed in one special game state (the number of rounds), the continuation rate is changed, and the number of times the unit switching control is actually performed. It is possible to realize a game such as making the player pay attention to (passing to the first passing section). That is, not only a simple game such as simply entering a ball into the variable ball entering device, but also the timing of entering the variable ball entering device, the opening timing of the variable ball entering device, and the flow of the game ball, etc. A game that draws attention can be realized, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

(40) In the configuration of (39) above, the condition that the game ball passes through the first passing portion is set as the continuation condition in the unit switching control, but it may be changed as follows. For example, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the lottery based on the winning to one of the operation ports 38, 39 is a jackpot result, and the fact that it is notified by a predetermined notification unit) , the variable ball-entering device is controlled to be switched to an open state, and by allowing the game ball to pass through the first passing portion in the open state, the variable ball-entering device or the variable ball-entering device is placed in a state advantageous to the player. is configured to shift to a special game state (so-called jackpot state) in which unit switching control of different variable ball entry devices is performed. Even in such a configuration, if the timing to be in the open state (or to be in the closed state) is changed, the passing rate to the first passing section (special game state transition rate) can be varied. In other words, the rate of occurrence of the special game state is changed not only by the probability of winning a lottery based on the ball entering the operation openings 38 and 39 and the rate of ball entering the variable ball entering device, but also by the opening/closing pattern of the variable ball entering device. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

(41) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, arithmetic processing is performed based on the passage information of the left passage area 412, the right passage area 413, and the back passage area 414 in the accessory device 150. The information is not limited to the area within the accessory device 150 . That is, it is sufficient if the game ball can pass within the game area PE, and more preferably, the upstream side of the ball entrance portion (first operation opening 38, second operation opening 39, etc.) through which the game ball can enter It is sufficient if it is an area arranged in

(42) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the arithmetic processing is configured to calculate the passing rate for the number of shots, the passing rate for each winning number, and the V winning rate for each passing number. Any configuration may be used as long as the arithmetic processing is performed using the passing information of the areas 412 to 414 . For example, the configuration may be such that arithmetic processing is performed on the passage information of the passage areas 412-414. Specifically, the ratio of the number of passages of the right passage area 413 to the number of passages of the left passage area 412, or the number of passages of the rear passage area 414 to the number of passages of the left and right passage areas 412 and 413 may be calculated. A deviation rate with respect to the number of passing areas 412 to 414 may be calculated. In addition, when performing arithmetic processing in relation to the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion such as the V winning hole 182a, it is not limited to the number of passages in the passage area arranged upstream of the predetermined ball entering portion. Alternatively, arithmetic processing may be performed based on the relationship between a predetermined ball-entering portion and the number of passages in passage areas arranged in separate areas.

(43) In the thirteenth embodiment, error notification is performed based on information such as an error command. It may be configured to display the passing rate per number. In this way, the player can obtain the information for winning the V prize, and by making the information useful for the game, it is possible to encourage active participation in the game.

(44) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the passage rate is calculated with respect to the number of shot balls. Alternatively or additionally, the passage rate per unit time may be calculated. By doing so, it is not necessary to measure the number of shot balls, and the processing can be simplified. However, if the passing rate per unit time is taken into account, for example, there is a possibility that the time during which the game is not being played may be taken into consideration. and the passage rate for that time is calculated. Alternatively, the passing rate may be based on the number of winnings to the accessory device 400 . Specifically, a configuration may be employed in which calculation is performed only on the detection results within the accessory device 400, such as the passing rate for winning the accessory device 400 and the V winning rate for passing through the passage areas 412 to 414 (FIG. 66). . In this case, it is possible to grasp the peculiarities of the accessory device 400 itself, regardless of the rate of ball entry into other ball-entering sections or the rate of ball entry into the accessory device 400 . In general, accessories that allow game balls to enter and are distributed to various paths are mass-produced industrially, so the distribution rate for each path is uniform. It is considered. On the other hand, there may be individual differences such as a difference in the distribution rate of each route due to fluctuations in production and how to install. In that respect, if the peculiarities of the accessory device 400 can be specified by performing calculations based on the detection results in the accessory device 400 as described above, not only the design distribution rate but also the performance of the accessory device 400 can be determined. Data management can be performed taking individual differences such as peculiarities into consideration. 412 pass rate is high, it is possible to greatly use for fraud and abnormality detection.

(45) In the above 12th to 14th embodiments, as the comparison processing, the case where the design value exceeds +10% and the case where the design value is below -10% are regarded as error states, but only when the design value exceeds +10%. It may be configured to be in an error state. At least, if it is less than -10%, there should be no disadvantage from the point of view of the game hall side. In addition, the error rate for the error state with respect to the design value is not limited to plus or minus 10%, and may be an error rate higher than plus or minus 10% (~ plus or minus 100%) or an error rate lower than plus or minus 10 (~0%) may be used. In this case, a plurality of stages of error states may be set according to the error rate. Specifically, for example, when an error is determined at an error rate of plus or minus 5%, the first error state is set, and when an error is determined at an error rate of plus or minus 15%, the second error state is set. In the first error state, only external output to the hall computer of the game hall is performed as in the twelfth embodiment, and in the second error state, in addition to external output to the hall computer, effect control is performed as in the thirteenth embodiment. The configuration is such that the notification by the device 82 is also performed. Also, it is possible to stop the game when there is an obvious abnormality such as an error rate of plus or minus 50%.

(46) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the passage rate for each winning number to the first operation opening 38 and the second operation opening 39 is calculated. A configuration may be adopted in which the passage rate is calculated with respect to the number of times the accessory 168 is opened and closed. As described above, basically, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened once for one winning to the first operating port 38, and twice for one winning to the second operating port 39. This is because the number of wins and the number of times of opening and closing are not completely linked because the opening/closing accessory 168 is not in the open state when, for example, the result of losing (FIG. 11) is obtained although it is in the open state.

(47) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the main control device 81 is configured to grasp the passage information of the passage areas 412 to 414 and perform arithmetic processing. 414 may be configured to grasp the passage information and perform arithmetic processing. In this way, in the case of a configuration in which error notification is performed by the effect control device 82 as in the twelfth embodiment, there is no need to output an error command, and the number of commands can be reduced and the processing configuration can be simplified. can be planned. In particular, the passage areas 412 to 414 are different from the entering ball portion where prize balls are generated, and are for simply using passing information. It is considered that no problem will arise even if the passing information is grasped. In addition to the passing information of the passing areas 412 to 414, when performing arithmetic processing using the ball entering information (the information of the winning number counter) to the entering ball section, the main controller 81 sends a signal to the entering ball section. It may be configured to separately receive the ball entry information as a command, or receive a command (holding command, etc.) to output the ball entry information to the effect control device 82 when a ball enters a conventional ball entry section. A configuration may be adopted in which 1 is added to the counter for effect processing based on what has been done.

(48) In the thirteenth embodiment, the set time for the RTC effect is not limited to that shown in FIG. 70(b). At least, it suffices that the set time is set so as to be a timing that can occur multiple times during the business hours of the game hall.

(49) In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting time for error command output is not limited to that shown in FIG. 70(b). At least, it suffices that the set time is set so as to be a timing that can occur multiple times during the business hours of the game hall. Also, if there is a configuration in which error notification is not performed by the RTC effect (for example, a configuration in which error notification is performed by the error display unit or the speaker unit 64, or a configuration in which the error is output to the hall computer), before the set time of the RTC effect There is no need to provide a set time for error command output. Also, even if it does not occur periodically, for example, the error command output is frequently performed until a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening time of the game hall, and the frequency of command output is reduced after that. It may be a configuration in which intonation is added to.

(50) In the thirteenth embodiment, the RTC effect is delayed when an error occurs, but the RTC effect may not be executed. However, from the standpoint of not spoiling the expectations of the players who are looking forward to the RTC presentation, it is preferable to simply delay.

(51) In the thirteenth embodiment, the timing at which the RTC effect is performed may be notified in advance. For example, the pattern display device 51 performs a countdown notification from before the set time when the RTC effect is performed. In this way, even if the set time for the RTC presentation has come, the player sitting at the gaming machine can clearly understand that the RTC presentation will not be performed. In this case, the delay processing may be used to delay the countdown notification time. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the error state is set before the set time, and it is possible to substantially notify the error state without waiting for the set time of the RTC presentation.

(52) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the output target of the effect processing and the comparison processing is not limited to the effect control device 82 or the hall computer, Any device can be used. For example, data display devices installed in game halls are also included.

(53) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, when calculating the passing rate and the V winning rate of each of the passing areas 412 to 414, for example, not only the error rate from the set value but also the calculated passing rate and V The method of setting the error state and the error state to be set may be changed according to the winning rate. That is, for example, if the V winning rate for one passage in the left passage area 412 or the right passage area 413, in which the rotating body 201 is sorted after passing, is a high value such as 100%, obviously cheating has been performed. Alternatively, if the passage rate of the back passage area 412 to the winning of the accessory device 400 is a high value such as 100% with respect to the back passage area 412 in which the V prize is always generated when passing through It may be determined that there has been clear misconduct. Conversely, if the V winning rate for one pass through the back passing area 412 is not 100%, it means that ball clogging has clearly occurred, and the passing rate of the left and right passing areas 412 and 413 for winning a prize of the accessory device 400. is 0%, it is considered that the action of forcibly guiding the user to the back passage area 414 is being performed. Therefore, in such cases, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration by setting an error state without calculating the error rate. It is possible to take quick measures against such errors. However, for example, even if the passage rate of the back passage area 412 with respect to the winning of the accessory device 400 is 100%, considering the possibility of an accidental bias, for example, V winning as in the above embodiment may be considered. It is necessary to devise a way to calculate an average value, such as calculating after three occurrences of .

(54) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the cycle for resetting each passing number counter and winning number counter is not limited to the above. The counter may be reset when it reaches a predetermined value.

(55) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the detection results of the passage detection sensors 402 to 404 are used to detect the passage of one game ball a plurality of times in order to grasp the ball clogging. However, as long as it is possible to grasp ball clogging, for example, a motion sensor may be applied to detect that a single game ball is stationary or flowing down. good.

(56) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the passage detection sensors 402 to 404 are provided in the passage areas 412 to 414, respectively. good. Since the game ball entering the accessory device 400 passes through one of the passing areas 412 to 414, the game ball entering the accessory device 400 (the game ball detected by the entrance sensor 179) is This is because, if it is not detected in a passage area other than the passage area in which the passage detection sensor is not provided, it can be determined that the passage area has been distributed to the passage area in which the passage detection sensor is not provided.

(57) In the above 12th to 14th embodiments, if there is no passing information for each of the passing areas 412 to 414 (each passing number counter is 0), but a V winning occurs, it is obvious that Although V error is used as illegality or abnormality, it is possible to determine clear illegality or abnormality in other cases. That is, when the number of V winnings (V winning number counter) is greater than the total number of passages in each of the passage areas 412 to 414, or when the number of winnings to the accessory device 400 (Valley item winning number counter) If the total number of passages differs from the total number of passages to 414, or the number of winnings to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 (first winning number counter, second winning number counter) This is the case when the total number of numbers is large. In these cases as well, the same processing as V error may be performed as an obvious fraud or abnormality.

(58) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, one passage detection sensor 402 to 404 is provided in each of the passage areas 412 to 414, respectively. A plurality of sensors may be provided. In particular, in a passing area where sorting by the first sorting member 300 occurs, such as the left passing area 412, by specifying the passing information before and after the sorting, the sorting by the first sorting member 300 is normal. It is possible to identify whether the

(59) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the game ball that passed through any of the passage areas 412 to 414 was configured to win a prize, but at least one of the passage areas 412 to 414 It is sufficient that the passing game ball wins V, and the passing areas 412 to 414 may be overlapped and passable.

(60) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line visible from a display window after the reels are stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The following feature group is known as a game machine such as a pachinko machine that includes a variable ball entry device provided in a game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Triggered by the game ball passing through the operation opening provided in the game state shifts to a specific control state.In this case, the variable ball entry device is opened for a predetermined period, and the variable ball entry device Then, as a specific event (predetermined event), for example, a game ball enters a variable ball entering device and the game ball enters a V winning hole provided in the variable ball entering device. Based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth, the opening and closing of the variable ball-entering device or other variable ball-entering device is continuously performed in a predetermined manner after that.” Therefore, it is necessary to raise the level of attention to games in gaming machines. This has been accomplished with the problem to be solved by the invention.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable receiving means (role object device 150);
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (entering a ball into the operation ports 38, 39 or starting a round game) (The function of executing the opening and closing process by the main control device 81 and the function of executing the game control process);
a first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Privilege granting means (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) that grants a privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion and a function to execute the winning process),
The game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side in a first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). non-distribution state if so), distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (opening/closing pattern A, special opening A result or special opening B result, second opening timing table selected, The number of pieces of pending information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is grasped to be a predetermined result, and the number of times the game has been played since the opening/closing execution mode is equal to or less than a predetermined number; At the first timing, based on the fact that the conditions that make it easy to win a V prize are met, such as winning the changed lottery by the changed lottery process or that a V prize can be won through the normal route even after the temporary change. First switching execution means for executing the state switching control (setting processing for each round by main controller 81, function for executing processing for opening/closing pattern A in setting processing for each opening, control start processing, and control processing , the function of executing the processing for the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the function of executing the processing of setting the opening and closing timing based on the second opening timing table, and the number of pending information being equal to or greater than the predetermined number function to set the opening/closing timing based on the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the game status; A function to execute the opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that V winning is likely to occur, such as a function to execute processing);
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is met (open/close patterns B and C, normal opening result, first opening timing table selected) , the number of pending information is less than a predetermined number, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not a predetermined result, or the number of games played from the open/close execution mode exceeds a predetermined number of times, The conditions under which it is difficult for a V prize to occur have been met, such as not winning the changed lottery due to the changed lottery process, not being able to win a V prize through the normal route after the temporary change, or being able to win a V prize only through the normal route. ), the second switching execution means (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81 and setting processing for each opening) for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing. Function to execute processing for patterns B and C Function to execute normal opening result processing in control start processing and in-control processing Function to execute processing for setting opening/closing timing based on the first opening timing table Function to hold A function of executing processing for setting the opening/closing timing based on the fact that the number of pieces of information is less than a predetermined number; A game machine characterized by having a function of executing a process of adopting a provisionally set opening/closing timing as it is, and a function of executing opening/closing control of an opening/closing accessory 168 so as to prevent the occurrence of a V prize.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be received by the variable receiving means based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and when the game ball passes through the first passage portion, a privilege is awarded. , and sorting means are provided, and switching between the mode in which it is easy to pass through the first passing section side and the mode in which it is difficult to pass through is performed at a predetermined timing. In such a game machine, when a predetermined event occurs and the first condition is satisfied, state switching control is performed at a first timing to influence acceptance by the variable acceptance means, and a second condition different from the first condition is performed. When the two conditions are met, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the easiness/difficulty (passage rate) of passage to the first passage portion without changing the distribution mode of the distribution means.

In particular, if a game ball is received by the variable receiving means but does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means (occurs frequently), it is difficult for the player. Not only is interest in the game lowered because the privilege cannot be obtained, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, but the state switching timing is changed to make the reception timing to the variable receiving means different. By adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the side is changed, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be avoided.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means, the "predetermined timing" can be rephrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the occurrence of the specific event". good.

Feature A2. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first state. ball entry means (accessory device 150);
A variable ball entry that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (the entry of a ball into the operation openings 38 and 39 or the start of a round game). Control means (function for executing opening/closing processing by main control device 81 and function for executing game control processing);
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (outgoing passage 191b) through which a game ball entered by the variable ball entering means can pass;
Privilege granting means (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) that grants a privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion and a function to execute the winning process),
A first mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member If it is 310, it is in a non-distribution state), and distribution means (distribution members 300, 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
with
The variable ball entry control means is
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (opening/closing pattern A, special opening A result or special opening B result, second opening timing table selected, The number of pieces of pending information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the operation status of the sorting members 300 and 310 is grasped to be a predetermined result, and the number of times the game has been played since the opening/closing execution mode is equal to or less than a predetermined number; The first timing is based on the fact that the condition that makes it easy to win a V prize is met, such as winning the changed lottery by the changed lottery process or that a V prize can be won by the normal route even after the temporary change. , the first switching execution means for executing the state switching control (setting processing for each round by main controller 81, function for executing processing for opening/closing pattern A in setting processing for each opening, function by main controller 81 A function to execute processing for special opening A result and special opening B result in control start processing and control processing, a function to execute processing for setting opening and closing timing based on the second opening timing table, and the number of pending information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the game status, a function of performing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the A function of executing opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 so that V prizes are likely to occur, such as a function of executing the first opening/closing timing change process or the second opening/closing timing change process);
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is established (open/close patterns B and C, normal opening result, first opening timing table selected). that the number of reserved information is less than a predetermined number; that the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not a predetermined result; V prizes have occurred, such as exceeding the limit, not winning the change lottery due to the change lottery process, not being able to win V prizes through the normal route after the temporary change, or being able to win V prizes only through the normal route. second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81; A function of executing processing for opening/closing patterns B and C in the setting processing, a function of executing processing for normal opening results in the control start processing and control processing by the main controller 81, and a first opening timing table. A function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the number of pending information is less than a predetermined number, a function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the Executes the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 so as to prevent the occurrence of V prizes, such as the function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the state, the function of executing the process of adopting the temporarily set opening/closing timing as it is, etc. function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a sorting means, and switching between easy/hard to pass the first passage side is performed at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs and the first condition is established, state switching control is performed at a first timing to influence the ball entering the variable ball entering means. When a different second condition is established, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the easiness/difficulty (passage rate) of passage to the first passage portion without changing the distribution mode of the distribution means.

In particular, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means but does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means (occurs frequently), it is difficult for the player. Not only is interest in the game decreased because the privilege cannot be obtained, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, but the state switching timing is changed to make the ball entry timing to the variable ball entry means different. By adopting a configuration in which the passing rate to the passing portion side is changed, the occurrence of the above inconveniences can be avoided.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means, the "predetermined timing" can be rephrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the occurrence of the specific event". good.

Feature A3. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first state. ball entry means (accessory device 150);
Variable ball entry control means (opening/closing processing by main controller 81) that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (the start of a round game) function) and
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (outgoing passage 191b) through which a game ball entered by the variable ball entering means can pass;
Privilege granting means (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) that grants a privilege (continuation of the round game) to the player based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion;
A first mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member If it is 310, it is in a non-distribution state), and distribution means (distribution members 300, 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established (that the main controller 81 determines that the continuous rate variation mode is set in the processing of step S1204), the state switching control of the variable ball entry means is performed a predetermined number of times. A game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to a specific state that can be executed a number of times (opening and closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode);
with
The specific state is configured to perform the next state switching control based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion in one of the state switching controls,
The variable ball entry control means is
When the predetermined event occurs, the first switching execution means (main) executes the state switching control at the first timing in the specific state based on the establishment of the first condition (opening/closing pattern A). a function of executing the processing for the opening/closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round and the setting processing for each opening by the control device 81;
When the predetermined event occurs, based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is established (opening/closing patterns B and C), a second timing different from the first timing is established in the specific state. a second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at the timing (a function of executing the processing for the opening/closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for each round by the main controller 81 and the setting processing for each opening);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a sorting means, and switching between easy/hard to pass the first passage side is performed at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs and the first condition is established, state switching control is performed at a first timing to influence the ball entering the variable ball entering means. When a different second condition is established, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the easiness/difficulty (passage rate) of passage to the first passage portion without changing the distribution mode of the distribution means.

Further, the above configuration is a configuration in which the next state switching control is performed when the game ball passes through the first passing portion during one state switching control in the specific state, and in this specific state, the first passing portion A player has a strong interest in whether or not a game ball passes through.

In particular, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means but does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means (occurs frequently), it is difficult for the player. Not only does the next state switching control not take place, the player loses interest in the game, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the state switching timing is changed without changing the distribution timing on the side of the distribution means. By adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the side of the unit is changed, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be avoided.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means, the "predetermined timing" can be rephrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the occurrence of the specific event". good.

Feature A4. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first state. ball entry means (accessory device 150);
Variable ball entry control means (main control) for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the operation openings 38, 39) A function of executing game control processing by the device 81);
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (outgoing passage 191b) through which a game ball entered by the variable ball entering means can pass;
Privilege granting means (function for executing prize winning processing by main controller 81) that grants a privilege (occurrence of opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion;
A first mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member If it is 310, it is in a non-distribution state), and distribution means (distribution members 300, 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
The state switching control of the variable ball entry means can be executed a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established (that it has been determined in the win/fail determination process by the main controller 81 that it is not the result of a missed ball or a direct hit). Game state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific state (a state in which a process under control is performed based on the normal opening result, the special opening A result, or the special opening B result) (executing the game control process by the main controller 81 function) and
with
The variable ball entry control means is
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (special opening A result or special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, or the number of pending information is a predetermined number. The above, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, the number of times the game has been played from the open/close execution mode is less than the predetermined number of times, and the change by the change lottery process (e.g., winning the lottery or being able to win a V prize through a normal route even after the provisional change), the conditions that make it easier for a V prize to occur are met), at the first timing in the specific state. First switching execution means for executing state switching control (function for executing processing for special opening A result and special opening B result in control start processing and control processing by main controller 81, and based on the second opening timing table A function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on a function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the number of reserved information being equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the Opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 so as to facilitate the occurrence of V prizes, such as a function of executing processing for setting the opening/closing timing based on the state, a function of executing the first opening/closing timing change processing or the second opening/closing timing change processing, etc. function) and
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is established (normal opening result, selection of the first opening timing table, or a predetermined number of pending information The number of games is less than the number, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not a predetermined result, the number of times the game is played from the open/close execution mode exceeds the predetermined number, or the change by the change lottery process conditions that make V prizes less likely to occur, such as not winning the lottery, not being able to win V prizes through the normal route after the temporary change, or being able to win V prizes only through the normal route, etc.) second switching execution means (main controller 81) for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the start timing of the specific state different from that by the first switching execution means; A function to execute normal opening result processing in control start processing and control processing by, a function to execute processing for setting opening and closing timing based on the first opening timing table, and a function to execute processing for setting opening and closing timing based on the first opening timing table A function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on a certain event, a function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the game status, and a function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the temporarily set opening/closing timing. A function to execute the opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that V winning is unlikely to occur, such as a function to execute processing that is adopted as it is);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a sorting means, and switching between easy/hard to pass the first passage side is performed at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs and the first condition is established, state switching control is performed at a first timing to influence the ball entering the variable ball entering means. When a different second condition is established, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the easiness/difficulty (passage rate) of passage to the first passage portion without changing the distribution mode of the distribution means.

In particular, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means but does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means (occurs frequently), it is difficult for the player. Not only is interest in the game reduced without benefits being granted, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the state switching timing is changed without changing the distribution timing on the distribution means side, so that the ball entry timing to the variable ball entry means is changed. By adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the side of the outlet is changed, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be avoided.

Further, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific state is entered in which the ball can be entered by the variable ball entering means. And according to the said structure, the timing of state switching control can be varied, without varying the start timing of a specific state. As a result, not only is the rate of ball entry into the variable ball entry means varied in the specific state, but if the timing of the state switching control is set in relation to the switching timing of the mode of the sorting means, in the specific state, the While making it difficult to target the passage of a game ball to the first passage part, the passage rate to the first passage part side can be made different.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means, the "predetermined timing" can be rephrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the occurrence of the specific event". good.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion, so the privilege based on the passage is easily granted. Therefore, it is thought that the player will pay much attention to whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of feature A3, the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion in the specific state is the condition for shifting to the next state switching control, so when the first condition is established When the second condition is met, it is difficult to shift to the next state switching control. Therefore, it is possible to change not only which condition is satisfied in each state switching control, but also the continuation rate of the state switching control, thereby making it possible to make a novel game.

In addition, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of feature A4, it is possible to change the passage rate to the first passage portion without changing the start timing of the specific state. The grant rate (pass rate to the first passing portion) can be changed, and a novel game can be achieved.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable receiving means (role object device 150);
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (the start of a round game), variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means (execution of opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Privilege granting means (function for executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) that grants a privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion )and,
The game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side in a first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). non-distribution state if so), distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed multiple times (eg, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, is performed multiple times (eg, 16 times, RC1) ), a game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over a period of time;
with
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, the following specific control can be performed based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion,
The variable acceptance control means
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on the satisfaction of the first condition (for example, the satisfaction of a condition that facilitates the occurrence of a V prize, such as opening/closing pattern A). First switching execution means to be executed (setting processing for each round by main controller 81, processing for opening/closing pattern A in setting processing for each opening, etc., timing at which V allocation by main controller 81 is likely to be performed and A function of executing processing for opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that
During the specific control, based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is established (for example, that a condition that makes it difficult for a V prize to occur such as opening and closing patterns B and C is established), Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, setting processing for opening and closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for each opening) a function of executing processing for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that V allocation is difficult to perform, such as processing);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a privilege is given when a game ball received in a state where the game ball can be received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the variable receiving means includes: A sorting means is provided, and switching between easy/hard to pass the first passage side is performed at a predetermined timing. In such a game machine, when a predetermined condition is established, the specific control in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times is shifted to a special game state in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times. This special game state is configured so that the next specific control can be performed based on passing through the first passage part in one specific control, and therefore, only the number of received to the variable receiving means. Instead, the player's interest is focused on whether or not the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion.

In such a configuration, during one specific control, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the first timing, and when the second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing. In the variable receiving means, the distribution mode on the distribution means side is predetermined timing, and the distribution mode does not change. Thus, the ease/difficulty (passage rate) of passage to the first passage portion side can be varied without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

As a result, the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state can be designed without changing the distribution mode on the side of the distribution means, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means, the "predetermined timing" can be rephrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the occurrence of the specific event". good.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is established, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion, so based on the passage It is easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is thought that the player will pay much attention to whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied.

Feature B3. The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein during the special game state, switching timing of the distribution means is determined as a predetermined timing from the start of one of the specific controls. machine.

According to the above configuration, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means is fixed from the start of one specific control, while either the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. The timing of acceptance by the variable acceptance means differs depending on whether or not it is used, and therefore the passing rate to the first passing section changes. Thereby, the continuation rate of the specific control can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution means.

Feature B4. Characteristic B1 to characterized by comprising means for setting which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each of the specific controls of the special game state at the time of transition to the special game state The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied depends on the special game state. Because it is set at the time of transition, for example, at the start of the special game state (at the time of transition), notification regarding the continuation rate (notification that it is a special game state with a high continuation rate or a specific state with a low continuation rate , etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which condition is satisfied when the transition to the special game state is made, and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

It should be noted that "at the time of transition to the special game state" can also be rephrased as "based on the establishment of the predetermined condition".

Feature B5. Characteristic features B1 to B4 characterized by comprising means for setting, at the start of the specific control, which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each of the specific controls in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied depends on whether the condition is satisfied in the special game state. Since it is set at the start of the specific control, it is possible to always pay attention to which condition (whether the continuation rate is high or low) is satisfied in each specific control.

Feature B6. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein a plurality of the distribution means are provided on a flow path of one game ball.

According to the above configuration, the subsequent passage rate to the first passage portion changes depending on the combination of the first mode and the second mode in each sorting means. Since the execution timing of the state switching control is set differently depending on which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the passing rate of the first passing section can be set more diversely. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

It should be noted that "a game ball received by the variable receiving means is sent to either the first passing portion side or the second passing portion side by performing a periodic operation, which is provided separately from the distribution means. If a configuration is provided in which a periodic operation means (rotating body 201) that can be derived is provided, each distribution means that switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing and the periodic operation is performed. It is possible to clarify the distinction between the periodical operation means that is used.

Feature B7. As each of the plurality of distribution means provided, a first distribution means (first distribution member 300, rotating body 201) visible from the front of the game machine, A gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that a second distribution means (second distribution member 310) lower than the distribution means is provided.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific control continues when the game ball passes through the first passage portion in the special game state, if the distribution means for distributing the passage rate to the first passage portion can be visually recognized, the distribution It is preferable from the viewpoint that it is possible to enjoy the game by watching how the minutes are played, and to increase the degree of attention to the game. On the other hand, if the sorting means is visible, there is a possibility that an act of targeting the sorting means will be performed, and a problem may arise that it becomes difficult to discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, by providing a plurality of distribution means and providing a difference in visibility, it is possible to solve the conflicting problems caused by the visibility.

Feature B8. It is characterized in that the possibility that the game ball passes through the first passing portion is higher when the second distribution means is in the first mode than when the first distribution means is in the first mode. The gaming machine according to feature B7.

According to the above configuration, since there is a higher possibility that the ball will pass through the first passing portion when the ball is sorted by the second sorting means on the side of low visibility, it is more preferable to suppress the target shot. be able to. As described above, even if there are conflicting issues due to the visibility level, if cheating occurs, it will be disadvantageous not only to the pachinko parlors and game machine manufacturers, but also to other players who are playing legitimate games. can give Therefore, anti-fraud measures are considered to be the top priority.

Feature B9. When the game ball received by the variable receiving means reaches the distribution means, even if the distribution means is in the second mode, the game ball can be drawn out to the first passing portion thereafter. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to leave the possibility of passing through the first passing section regardless of whether the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed by either the first switching executing means or the second switching executing means. By doing so, even though the continuation rate of the specific control is changed depending on the timing of the state switching control, the continuation rate is not determined by that alone, and if state switching control with a low continuation rate is performed, Even so, it is possible to prevent an extreme decrease in interest in the game.

Feature B10. In the special game state, when the game ball passes through the first passing portion during one of the specific controls, even if the period for performing the specific control remains, the next specific control is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls received by the variable receiving means in one specific control differs depending on the timing of passing through the first passing portion during one specific control. Therefore, it is thought that the player will have a high interest in when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

It should be noted that, in more detail, the “period during which the specific control is performed” can be rephrased as “the number of times of the state switching control in the specific control”.

Feature B11. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing,
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein in the one specific control, the first condition is set so as to be easily established at a timing later than the second condition.

According to the above configuration, during the period in which one specific control is performed, it becomes easier to be controlled so that the game ball can easily pass through the first passing portion side as it moves to the rear side. By doing so, the number of game balls received by the variable receiving means during one specific control is increased, and the period during which the player is interested in whether or not the game ball passes through the first passing portion is lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B12. Characteristic B1 characterized in that the period during which the one state switching control is performed during the specific control is set to the same period regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. The game machine according to any one of B11.

According to the above configuration, while changing the passing rate of the first passing section, that is, the continuation rate of the specific control, the period required for each state switching control in the specific control is the same period, so the fairness of the game is guaranteed be done. This is because if the period required for each state switching control is made different, not only the continuation rate of the specific control but also the number of game balls accepted by the variable receiving means will be different.

Feature B13. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls in the special game state, setting means for setting which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control,
The setting means is capable of making it easier for the first condition to be satisfied than the second condition in the state switching control for a first predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12.

According to the above configuration, in the specific control of the first predetermined number of times, since the first condition is likely to be satisfied, the game ball is likely to pass through the first passage portion. That is, the continuation rate of the specific control for the first predetermined number of times is high. Therefore, in the specific control for the first predetermined number of times, the special game state can be enjoyed gracefully assuming that the specific control continues. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature B14. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls in the special game state, setting means for setting which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control,
The setting means is characterized in that it is possible to make it easier for the second condition to be satisfied than the first condition in the specific control for a second predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls. The game machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

According to the above configuration, in the specific control of the second predetermined number of times, since the second condition is likely to be established, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the first passing portion. That is, the continuation rate of the specific control for the second predetermined number of times is low. Therefore, in the specific control of the second predetermined number of times, whether or not the specific control continues, that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the first passing portion, attention is paid to the whereabouts of the game ball, and the special game Attention can be inflated during the state. Therefore, interest can be improved.

In relation to the feature B13, the "second predetermined number of times" may be expressed as "a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times".

Feature B15. The setting means is capable of making it easier for the first condition to be satisfied than the second condition in the specific control subsequent to the second predetermined number of times. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation rate is continued for the second predetermined number of times with a low continuation rate, the continuation rate is set to be high in the next specific control. or not is an important factor, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific control for the second predetermined number of times.

Feature B16. The special game state transferred by the game state transfer means includes a first special game state (16R continuation mode) in which the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second condition, and the second condition rather than the first condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, characterized by being provided with a second special game state (continuous variation mode) in which conditions are likely to be satisfied.

According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the specific control in the special game state differs depending on whether the special game state is the first special game state or the second special game state. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the type of special game state, and to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B17. The game state transition means is configured to be able to transition to the special game state based on the game ball received by the variable receiving means passing through the first passing portion,
Predetermined notification means (symbol display device) indicating whether to shift to the first special game state or the second special game state from passing through the first passing portion to at least shifting to the special game state 51) includes a notification control means (a function that executes the opening and closing execution mode effect based on the control end command from the main control device 81 by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to feature B16, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided in the vicinity of the variable reception means.

According to the above configuration, before the transition to the special game state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is accepted by the variable receiving means and whether or not the accepted game ball passes through the first passing portion. After that, pay attention to which special game state to shift to. Further, since the predetermined notification means is provided in the vicinity of the variable reception means, even if the player's attention is different, each notification is performed within a range that can be seen naturally. , it is possible to suppress the diversification of the players' interest destinations.

It should be noted that "the predetermined notification means is in the vicinity of the variable receiving means" means, for example,
``The variable receiving means and the predetermined notification means are provided in a production unit having each, and the production unit is installed in a game area where a game ball flows down'',
"A fixing unit is provided for fixing the variable receiving means and the predetermined notification means to the game board, and in the fixing unit, the predetermined notification means is fixed to an enclosure covering the variable receiving means. It is also possible to express it as a configuration, etc.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A variable receiving means ( Accessory device 150),
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
a first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, the game state transition processing (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
The game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side in a first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). non-distribution state if so), distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
The state switching of the variable reception means is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the occurrence of a ball entering the operation openings 38, 39, the end of the waiting time for opening, the end of the variable display time, etc.). Game state transition means (function to execute game control processing by main controller 81) that can shift control to a specific state (state in which control processing is performed based on normal opening result etc.) that can be executed a predetermined number of times )and,
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the predetermined condition is established, the state is established at the first timing based on the establishment of the first condition (for example, the establishment of a condition that facilitates the occurrence of a V prize, such as a result of special opening). First switching execution means for executing switching control (function for executing processing of opening and closing control of opening and closing accessory 168 at timing at which V distribution is likely to occur);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without changing the condition establishment timing from the case of the first switching execution means (V allocation is less likely to occur) function of executing the processing of opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 at the timing);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and the game ball passes through the first passing portion, the special game state is entered. At a predetermined timing, the mode is switched to make it easier or harder to pass through the first passage side. In such a game machine, the state switching control of the variable acceptance means is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and in that case, when the first condition is established, the acceptance to the variable acceptance means is performed at the first timing. is performed, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the easiness/difficulty (passage rate) of passage to the first passage portion without changing the distribution mode of the distribution means.

In particular, if a game ball is received by the variable receiving means but does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means (occurs frequently), it is quite special for the player. Not only does the transition to the game state not take place, the interest in the game decreases, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the state switching timing is changed without changing the distribution timing of the distribution means. By adopting a configuration in which the rate of passage to is changed, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the sorting means, the "predetermined timing" can be rephrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the occurrence of the specific event". good.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion, so the privilege based on the passage is easily granted. Therefore, it is thought that the player will be greatly interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, in the feature C1, since the passing rate to the first passing section can be changed without changing the timing at which the predetermined condition is established, the rate of transition to the special game state (second Pass rate to 1 passing part) can be changed, and it can be made into a novel game.

Feature C3. Characteristic C1 characterized in that the sorting means is characterized in that the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a timing predetermined after the predetermined condition is established. Or the gaming machine according to feature C2.

According to the above configuration, the sorting means switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, it is easier to give the player a sense of fairness in the game, compared to a configuration in which the sorting means switches at random timings. On the other hand, as described in feature C1, the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means differ in the state switching control timing during the specific state. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to vary the passing rate to the first passing portion by performing the state switching control by each switching executing means.

Feature C4. The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means execute the state switching control at the first timing and the second timing without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that it has a configuration that allows different timings.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to vary the passage rate to the first passage portion without varying the number of times the state switching control is performed in one specific state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels unfairness due to an increase or decrease in the number of times of state switching control.

Feature C5. The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means are configured to switch between the first timing and the second switching execution means without changing the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in one of the specific states. The game machine according to any one of the characteristics C1 to C4, wherein the execution timing of the state switching control can be made different depending on the timing.

According to the above configuration, since the length of the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state and can receive the game ball is the same, even if the state switching control is performed by any of the switching execution means, the variable receiving means The acceptance rate (ball entry rate) itself does not change. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, it is configured to include "means (payout device 96) for awarding a privilege (a prize ball based on winning to the accessory device 150) to the player based on the reception of the game ball by the variable receiving means". As a result, fairness can be further enhanced by the fact that the acceptance rate to the variable acceptance means does not change. By the way, in view of the game characteristics of how to pass the game ball to the first passage part, the privilege given based on the game ball being received by the above-mentioned variable receiving means is the first passage part. It is preferable that the privilege is different from the privilege (transition to the special game state) granted based on the passage of the ball.

Feature C6. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the state switching control on the rear side is more likely to be performed by the first switching execution means than the state switching control on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the passage rate to the first passing section is higher in the rear state switching control than in the front state switching control. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the specific state to the end, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C7. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing,
In one of the state switching controls in the specific state, the state switching control is performed between a long-term mode and a short-term mode so that the length of the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is relatively long or short. is set and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the first switching execution means is configured to facilitate selection of the state switching control that is the long-term mode.

According to the above configuration, since the passage rate to the first passage portion increases in the state switching control in the long-term mode, the acceptance rate to the variable receiving means and the passage rate to the first passage portion are linked. Therefore, points to which the player should pay attention are clarified, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C8. The shooting means shoots game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle (0.6 sec),
The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means are configured to switch between the first timing and the second switching execution means without changing the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in one of the specific states. A configuration that allows the execution timing of the state switching control to be different depending on the timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, in the state switching control in the short-term mode, the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is shorter than the firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature C7, characterized in that it is set.

According to the above configuration, although the acceptance of game balls cannot be expected in the short-term state switching control, the maximum acceptance of game balls can be expected in the long-term state switching control. Therefore, the timing at which the player should pay attention becomes clearer, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

Feature C9. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means and when the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution means, the specific state ends earlier by the first switching execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that it can be set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, which increases the passage rate to the first passing section, the specific state ends earlier, so that, for example, the next specific state is waiting. In this case, it is possible to shift to the next specific state early, and when passage to the first passing part occurs, it is possible to shift to the special game state early after the specific state ends. Therefore, the game can be smoothly progressed, and even if the passage to the first passage portion does not occur, the player can quickly change his or her mind without giving the player time to become discouraged. can be encouraged.

Feature C10. In the sorting means, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
Any one of the characteristics C1 to C9, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state as the state switching control. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the sorting means is switched at a predetermined timing after the variable receiving means starts switching from the second state to the first state. By doing so, the operation start timing of the variable receiving means and the operation start timing of the sorting means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further ensured.

Feature C11. In the sorting means, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game area is provided with a ball entry portion (operation openings 38, 39) into which a game ball can enter,
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the ball entering the ball entering section or the ball entering information based on the ball entering the ball entering section becoming a predetermined determination target. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the specific state is started based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion, or the specific state is started based on the ball entry information based on the entering ball becoming a predetermined determination target. be done. Then, switching of the sorting means is performed at a predetermined timing from the start of the specific state. By doing so, the timing at which the ball entered into the ball entry section or ball entry information is subject to determination and the operation start timing of the sorting means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further ensured.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable receiving means (role object device 150);
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (the start of a round game), variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means (execution of opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a specific passing portion (V winning path 191a) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed multiple times (eg, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, is performed multiple times (eg, 16 times, RC1) ), a game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over a period of time;
with
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, it is possible to perform the following specific control based on the continuation condition that the game ball has passed through the specific passage part, and based on the establishment of the continuation condition. It is a configuration that becomes
The specific control includes a high continuation specific control and a low continuation specific control in which the easiness of establishment of the continuation condition is relatively high and low, and
As the period during which each of the state switching controls of the specific control is performed, a first predetermined period during which the state switching control is performed at a first timing assuming that the control timing of the state switching control is different, and a period different from the first timing. A second predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at two timings is set,
In the predetermined specific control in the special game state, based on the establishment of the continuation condition in the first predetermined period, the next specific control is set as the high continuation specific control, and in the second predetermined period the A setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1408 by the main controller 81) capable of setting the next specific control as the low continuation specific control based on the establishment of the continuation condition is provided. Characteristic game machine.

According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the next specific control differs depending on whether the continuation condition is satisfied during the first predetermined period or whether the continuation condition is satisfied during the second predetermined period. As a result, it is considered that the player is highly interested in the timing at which the continuation condition is established in the predetermined specific control. Such an effect can be realized only by changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable acceptance means, and the attention to the game can be favorably increased with a simple configuration.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein in the predetermined specific control, the first predetermined period is set later than the second predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period on the rear side in the specific control, the next specific control becomes the high continuation specific control, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, each specific control during the special game state can be enjoyed for a longer time, which is preferable for the player. Furthermore, for example, in the specific control, it is possible to adjust the receiving timing of the game ball to the variable receiving means so that the continuation condition is established during the first predetermined period, not during the second predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to create a new game that adjusts the continuation condition establishment timing during specific control.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific passing portion than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, the state switching control is performed at a timing that makes it easier for the vehicle to pass through the specific passage portion during the first predetermined period on the rear side. . Therefore, for example, during the second predetermined period in which the continuation condition is unlikely to be satisfied, the player does not want to pass through the specific passage section, and waits for the first predetermined period after that to allow the player to pass through the specific passage section. be able to.

Feature D4. The length of the period of the first state is set so that the game ball can be received by the variable receiving means in either the first predetermined period or the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, since the game ball is received by the variable receiving means in the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period in the specific control, it is possible to make it meaningful to continue shooting the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stop shot that stops the shooting of the game ball.

Feature D5. Any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is set longer in the second predetermined period than in the first predetermined period. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is established, even if the next specific control is the second predetermined period in which the low continuation specific control can be performed, it is meaningful to continue shooting the game ball. For example, the number of times of specific control is limited in the special game state, and the next continuation rate is irrelevant in the specific control of the upper limit number of times. Therefore, with the configuration as described above, it is possible to make the player want the game with the intention of having the variable receiving means accept the game ball even during the second predetermined period.

Feature D6. The special game state is the special game state when the number of times of the state switching control reaches a predetermined number of times (RC2=19) in one of the specific controls, and the continuation condition is not established. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the game ends.

According to the above configuration, it is conceivable that the player tries to establish the continuation condition before the number of times of state switching control reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set after the specific control, as in feature D2, for example, it is considered that the continuation condition should be satisfied as much as possible on the latter side. . Therefore, a sense of balance between the end condition of the special game state (reaching a predetermined number of times without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the continuation condition being satisfied during the first predetermined period is provided. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D7. The special game state, in one of the specific control, when the number of acceptance to the variable acceptance means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the special The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the game state is terminated.

According to the above configuration, it is conceivable that the player tries to satisfy the continuation condition before the number of coins received by the variable receiving means reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set after the specific control, as in feature D2, for example, it is considered that the continuation condition should be satisfied as much as possible on the latter side. . Therefore, a sense of balance between the end condition of the special game state (reaching the predetermined number without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the continuation condition being satisfied during the first predetermined period is provided. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D8. Any of the characteristics D1 to D7, wherein the setting means is characterized in that when the current specific control is set to the high continuation specific control, the next specific control is also easily set to the high continuation specific control. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is established during the first predetermined period in the predetermined specific control during the special game state, the high continuation specific control is likely to be set after the next time. Therefore, the degree of interest in the predetermined specific control is further increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the predetermined specific control is the low continuation specific control.

According to the above configuration, even in the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is unlikely to be satisfied, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period, the next specific control is set to the high continuation specific control. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention even during the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a specific control subsequent to the predetermined specific control can also be set to the predetermined specific control.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined specific control with different continuation conditions can be continued depending on the establishment timing, so that each specific control during the special game state attracts a high degree of interest (not to miss the establishment timing of the continuation condition) can be made).

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A variable receiving means ( Accessory device 150),
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
a first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, privilege granting means (for example, a game by the main controller 81 function to execute state transition processing),
The game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side in a first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). non-distribution state if so), distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
with
The control mode of the state switching control of the variable acceptance control means includes:
A game ball accepted by the variable receiving means includes a first timing (timing at which V sorting can be performed) at which the sorting means is likely to reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is in the one mode. A first state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is in the first state (opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that the V allocation is easy to perform);
A game ball received by the variable receiving means includes a second timing (timing at which V distribution is difficult to perform) at which it is difficult for the game balls to reach the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is in the first mode. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is in the first state (opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that the timing is difficult to perform V allocation);
is set and
When the state switching control is to be executed, the variable acceptance control means is a switching means (for example, a main control device 81) for switching between the first state switching control mode and the second state switching control mode. The control timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, such as setting processing for the round, setting processing for each opening, and processing during control, is controlled so that the opening/closing mode is the timing at which V allocation is easy to perform and the opening/closing mode at the timing that is not. A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the above configuration, when the game balls received by the variable receiving means are distributed to the first passing section side as a result of being distributed by the distribution means in which the distribution destination is changed at a predetermined timing, the game ball is played. benefits are given to the person. In such a configuration, the variable acceptance control means for performing state switching control of the variable acceptance means includes a first switching control mode capable of executing variable acceptance control including a first timing at which the first passing portion side is easily passed; Since the second variable reception control mode including the second timing at which it is difficult to pass through the first passage side is provided with the switching means capable of switching, the distribution means side that operates at the predetermined timing is provided. It is possible to vary the easiness/difficulty of passing through the first passing portion (passage rate) without changing the sorting mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature E2. The first timing is set so as to include a timing at which even the game ball received by the variable receiving means at the first timing is unlikely to pass through the first passing portion. The gaming machine described in E1.

According to the above configuration, even if the sorting means accepts the variable receiving means at the first timing, it will not always be sorted to the first passing section side, so there is no need to worry even at the first timing. to keep interest in the destination of accepted game balls. Therefore, interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the second timing is set to a timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass through the first passing portion.

According to the above configuration, even if the distribution means accepts the variable acceptance means at the second timing, the possibility of passing through the first passing section remains, the player is not discouraged, and the player's interest in the game is extremely high. can be suppressed.

Feature E4. The first state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control performed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the state switching control is set as the first timing at which the sorting means is easily reached in a certain situation.

According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control, even if there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing, is not the state switching control, but the other state switching control. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing at which the first passing portion side is easily reached, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

Feature E5. The state switching control different from the state switching control at the first timing among the plurality of state switching controls is performed prior to the state switching control at the first timing. The game machine according to feature E4, characterized in that a one-state switching control mode is set.

According to the above configuration, since the state switching control on the side other than the state switching control which is the first timing is performed first, at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is the first state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest in each state switching control mode and to immerse the player in the game.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the allocating means is configured to be switchable at the predetermined timing from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution means can be defined independently of the first timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the first timing, for example, one state switching control can be performed in accordance with the regulations of the game machine. By changing the state switching control (state switching control at the first timing) other than the above, the excellent effect described in feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E7. The second state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control performed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the state switching control is set as the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the sorting means in a certain situation.

According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control, even if there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing, is not the state switching control, but the other state switching control. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the second timing when it is difficult to reach the first passing portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

If the configuration is applied to a gaming machine having feature E4, both state switching control modes become state switching control multiple times, and the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode can be enhanced. .

Feature E8. The state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing among the plurality of state switching controls is performed prior to the state switching control at the second timing. The game machine according to feature E7, characterized in that a two-state switching control mode is set.

According to the above configuration, since the state switching control on the side other than the state switching control at the second timing is performed first, at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is the second state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest in each state switching control mode and to immerse the player in the game.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the allocating means is configured to be switchable at the predetermined timing from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution means can be defined independently of the second timing. That is, since it is possible to set the distribution timing of the distribution means in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the second timing, for example, one state switching control may be performed in accordance with the regulations of the game machine. By changing the state switching control (state switching control at the second timing) other than the above, the excellent effect described in feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E10. The first state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control performed a plurality of times. It is set as the state switching control that becomes the first timing at which the distribution means is easily reached in a certain situation,
The second state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control performed a plurality of times. is set as the state switching control that becomes the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the distribution means in a certain situation,
The state switching control different from the state switching control at the first timing and the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing are set to be executed at the same timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control, even if there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing, is not the state switching control, but the other state switching control. By performing the state switching control at the first timing at which the first passage side is easily reached and the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the first passing portion side, the excellent effect described in the characteristic E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation. can do. By executing the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing at the same timing, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode.

Feature E11. The state switching control different from the state switching control at the first timing among the plurality of state switching controls is performed prior to the state switching control at the first timing. 1 state switching control mode is set,
The state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing among the plurality of state switching controls is performed prior to the state switching control at the second timing. A two-state switching control mode is set,
The game machine according to feature E10, wherein the allocating means is configured to be switchable at the predetermined timing from the timing at which each of the different state switching controls is performed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the switching timing of the distribution means in accordance with the timing at which the state switching control is performed on the side different from the first timing and the second timing. As in the above feature E10, it is difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode it is. Because it is performed in the Therefore, for example, it is possible to deter the action of aiming at the first state switching control mode.

Feature E12. The variable acceptance control means performs a plurality of specific controls (round games) in which the state switching control of the variable acceptance means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Game state transition means (game state transition processing by main controller 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (open/close execution mode of continuity rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over times (for example, 16 times, RC1) function),
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, the following specific control can be performed based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion. The game machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied to the control mode of the variable acceptance control during the special game state, and the excellent effect of feature E1 can be achieved.

Feature E13. The privilege granting means is configured to be able to shift the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state as the privilege,
The variable acceptance control means, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established (the occurrence of a ball entering the operation openings 38 and 39, the end of the waiting time for opening, the end of the variable display time, etc.), A game state transition means (by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to a specific state in which the state switching control of the variable acceptance means can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal opening result, etc.) A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized by comprising a function of executing game control processing.

According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied particularly to the control mode of the variable acceptance control during the normal game state, and the excellent effect of feature E1 can be achieved.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (first operation opening 38, second operation opening 39) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a specific number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit;
Transition determination means for sequentially executing transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (function for executing right/wrong determination processing by main controller 81) )and,
In a gaming machine comprising
In the game area,
A specific passing portion (V winning opening 182a) through which game balls can pass;
A first mode (open state or distributed state) provided on the upstream side of the specific passage part and easy to lead the game ball to the specific passage part and a game ball to the specific passage part than the first mode Distributing means (opening/closing accessory 168, first distributing members 300, 310) that can be switched to a difficult second mode (closed state or non-distributing state),
is provided,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific passing portion, the game state transition means (the function of executing the game state transition process by the main controller 81) that can shift the game state to an advantageous state for the player )and,
Variable distribution control means for executing mode switching control between the first mode and the second mode of the distribution means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
with
The variable distribution control means is
When the transition determination is made by the transition determination means, the mode switching control is executed at a first timing based on the fact that the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a first predetermined number. First switching execution means (for example, a function of executing game control processing by the main control device 81 when the common reservation number CRN is 0);
When the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the second predetermined number is based on the fact that the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a second predetermined number different from the first predetermined number. Second switching execution means for executing the mode switching control at a second timing different from 1 timing (for example, a function of executing game control processing by the main control device 81 when the common reservation number CRN is 3);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the ball entering the ball entering section, the special information is stored in the information storage means up to a specific number, and the stored special information is sequentially used for transition determination. In the target gaming machine, a specific passage portion is provided in the game area, and distribution means is provided upstream of the specific passage portion, and the distribution mode switching control is performed at the time of transition determination. It is performed at different timings depending on the number of stored special information. This makes it possible to associate the number of stored special information with the rate of passage to the specific passage section. For example, if the number of stored special information is large, mode switching control may be performed at the timing at which passage to the specific passage section is likely to occur. If the number of special information stored is small, mode switching control is performed at a timing when it is easy to pass through the specific passage section, and the rate of transition to an advantageous state is changed in relation to the number of stored special information. can do.

Here, for example, as a configuration for changing the transition rate to the advantageous state in relation to the number of memories, if it is assumed that whether or not to transition to the advantageous state through a lottery based on numerical information is determined, the lottery probability can be varied according to the number of stored numbers. However, if such a configuration is adopted, the transition to an advantageous state is determined only by the exchange of numerical information, and not only does it deviate from the original enjoyment of the game machine, such as enjoying the flow of the game ball, but only the numerical information is used. It also increases the possibility of cheating by taking advantage of the game property that progresses by exchanging. Therefore, as in the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball moves to an advantageous state by passing through the specific passage portion, mode switching control of the distribution means on the upstream side of the specific passage portion is used as the number of special information stored. By associating, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts while enjoying the flow of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature F2. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific passing portion than the second timing,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first predetermined number is set to be greater than the second predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, as the number of special information stored in the information storage means increases, mode switching control is executed at a timing that facilitates passage through the specific passage section. Thus, it is possible to create a new game in which a large amount of special information is expected to be stored in the information storage means, and improve interest.

Feature F3. Feature F2 characterized in that a predetermined state (opening/closing execution mode) in which transition determination by the transition determination means is not performed even if the special information is stored in the information storage means is set as the game state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature F2, since the transition determination is not performed in the predetermined state, the special information is likely to accumulate. As a result, it is possible to create a game such as how to store the special information during the predetermined state.

It should be noted that the predetermined state can also be expressed as a state in which "while the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the transition determination is not performed by the transition determination means."

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the predetermined state is the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific passing portion and shifts to the advantageous state, the transition determination for the special information is not performed, and as a result, the special information tends to accumulate during the advantageous state. For example, when the termination condition of the advantageous state is satisfied and terminated, and the transition determination is performed for the accumulated special information, the mode switching control is performed at the timing at which the game ball easily passes through the specific passing portion as described above. . As a result, favorable conditions will continue. In this way, instead of realizing a change in the probability of transition to an advantageous state or a succession of advantageous states by a lottery using numerical information, the player can visually understand the mode switching control of the game state and the sorting means. By realizing this within the possible range, it becomes possible to create new games in which the fairness of games is guaranteed.

Feature F5. As the sorting means,
A first distribution means (opening/closing accessory 168) in which the mode switching control is executed by the first switching execution means or the second switching execution means according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage means; ,
Regardless of the number of the special information stored in the information storage means, second distribution means (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, second 2 distribution member 310),
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein

According to the above configuration, there are provided the first sorting means whose mode switching control timing differs depending on the number of special information stored, and the second sorting means which does not differ in mode switching control timing. Since the first distribution means is provided, it is easy to give the player a sense of fairness in the game.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the first sorting means is arranged upstream of the second sorting means in a flow-down route to the specific passing section.

According to the above configuration, by making the timing at which mode switching control of the first sorting means on the upstream side of the second sorting means is performed different according to the number of special information, at the predetermined timing As for the second sorting means in which mode switching control is performed, it is also possible to vary the sorting rate to the specific passing section by setting the first sorting means. Therefore, the effect of the feature F5 can be exhibited more preferably.

Feature F7. The game area is provided with a predetermined receiving device (accessory device 150) capable of receiving game balls,
The specific passing portion is arranged at a position through which the game ball received in the predetermined receiving device can pass,
The first sorting means is provided at a position where it is difficult to sort the game balls received in the predetermined receiving device, while the second sorting means is received in the predetermined receiving device. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, which is provided at a position where game balls can be distributed.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game balls received in the receiving device are to be distributed to the specific passage section side by the second distribution means. For example, when a game ball received in the receiving device is distributed to a side different from the specific passage section by the first distribution means, the player feels that some kind of operation has been performed in the game hall or the game machine side. Then you may feel mistrust. On the other hand, with the above configuration, the game balls received in the receiving device are distributed by the second distribution means operating at a constant timing without involving the first distribution means. is performed, it is easy to give a sense of fairness.

Feature F8. The first distributing means becomes a mode in which the predetermined receiving device can receive the game ball by becoming the first mode, and the game ball is received by the predetermined receiving device by becoming the second mode. A gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized in that it is in a form that is difficult to accept.

According to the above configuration, the first sorting means and the second sorting means can be preferably arranged in relation to the predetermined receiving device. Further, even if game balls are received by a predetermined receiving device, they are not necessarily all passed through the specific passing section because they are sorted by the second sorting means. Therefore, even if the timing of mode switching control by the first sorting means is changed to change the acceptance rate to a predetermined acceptance device, it is difficult to directly understand that the passage rate of the specific passage section changes. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel unfairness in the configuration in which the passage rate of the specific passage portion is changed.

Feature F9. The first switching execution means controls such that a period during which the state in which the first distribution means is in the first mode is maintained is a first period,
Characteristic feature F8, characterized in that the second switching executing means performs control such that a period in which the first distribution means is maintained in the first mode is the first period. game machine.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the mode switching control is performed by the first switching execution means or the mode switching control is performed by the second switching execution means, the acceptance rate to the predetermined receiving device does not change. Therefore, it is difficult to give a sense of unfairness to the game.

In addition, if it is configured to include "privilege granting means (payout device 96) capable of awarding a privilege (prize ball) to the player based on the acceptance of the game ball into a predetermined receiving device", the acceptance The effect of not changing the ratio can be produced more concretely.

Feature F10. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific passing portion than the second timing,
The first predetermined number is set as a larger number than the second predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first timing is set closer to the timing at which the transition determination is performed than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the greater the number of special information stored in the information storage means, the easier it is to pass through the specific passage section, the greater the number of special information, the faster the mode switching control is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a smooth and quick game while increasing the number of special information to realize a game in which it is easier for the player to pass through the specific passage portion.

Feature F11. The variable distribution control means can execute the mode switching control based on the fact that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is that the special information corresponds to the transition information. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the special information acquired based on the ball entering the ball entering section is subject to the transition determination, and the result of the transition determination is that it corresponds to the transition information. Based on this, mode switching control of the distribution means is executed by the variable distribution control means. Then, whether or not it becomes easier to pass through the specific passage portion is determined by this mode switching control. By applying to such a gaming machine a characteristic configuration in which mode switching control changes according to the number of stored special information of feature F1, in a game that starts with a ball entering the ball entering section, the entry The most important thing is the rate of ball entry into the ball section itself, and it is possible to create novel gameplay while emphasizing the original enjoyment of the game machine, such as entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entry section. . Therefore, interest can be improved.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable receiving means (role object device 150);
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (the start of a round game), variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means (execution of opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
First privilege giving means (opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) that gives the player the first privilege (continuation of the round game or occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode) based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion function) and
The game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side in a first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 and a second mode in which distribution to the first passing portion side is more difficult than in the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state). non-distribution state if so), distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310 and rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) can be executed as the first privilege based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode);
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, grasping means for grasping that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion (the function of executing the processing of steps S1329 and S1330 by the main controller 81);
with
The variable acceptance control means
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on the satisfaction of the first condition (for example, the satisfaction of a condition that facilitates the occurrence of a V prize, such as opening/closing pattern A). First switching execution means to be executed (setting processing for each round by main controller 81, processing for opening/closing pattern A in setting processing for each opening, etc., timing at which V allocation by main controller 81 is likely to be performed and a function to execute a function of executing a process for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that
During the specific control, based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is established (for example, that a condition that makes it difficult for a V prize to occur such as opening and closing patterns B and C is established), Second switching executing means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, setting processing for each opening, opening/closing patterns B, C); function of executing processing for opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 so that V allocation is difficult to perform, such as processing);
with
Second privilege granting means (step S1408 by main controller 81) capable of granting a second privilege (distribution table of FIG. 35, display mode of FIG. 41(b)) according to the grasping result of the grasping means and a function of executing the processing of step SB105 by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, during the normal game state, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the game moves to the special game state as the first privilege. In this special game state, the state switching control of the variable receiving means differs depending on whether it is performed by the first switching execution means or by the second switching execution means. rate will change. In this case, since the mode of the sorting means is switched at a predetermined timing, even if the passing rate to the first passing section is made different as described above, the player may feel a sense of distrust or unfairness. can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the special game state, it is grasped by the grasping means that the first passage portion has been passed, and the second privilege can be given based on the grasping result. Therefore, it is considered that the player wants the control by the first switching executing means to pass through the first passing portion during the special game state so that the second privilege is given. As a result of the above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is established, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion, so based on the passage It is easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is thought that the player will be greatly interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G3. A high-advantage mode (opening/closing pattern of pattern A, relief mode, or special mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high, and a low-advantage mode (opening/closing pattern of patterns B and C, normal mode). is set and
The second privilege is set as the high-advantage mode or the low-advantage mode,
Characteristic feature G1 or characteristic feature G2, wherein the second privilege providing means is configured to set either the high-advantage mode or the low-advantage mode based on the grasping result of the grasping means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode is set according to the passage state to the first passage portion during the special game state. As a player, of course, he or she would like to be set to an advantageous high-advantage mode, so naturally, the player is highly interested in the passage state of the first passage section. Therefore, attention to the game is enhanced.

Feature G4. Characteristic feature G3, characterized in that the second privilege granting means grants the second privilege based on the number of times or timing of passing through the first passing portion as a result of grasping by the grasping means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw more attention to the passage state to the first passage portion.

Feature G5. As the special game state, a first special game state (2R continuation mode open/close execution mode) in which the number of times that the specific control can be continued is set as the first number (for example, two times), and a number of times greater than the first number A second special game state (opening and closing execution mode of 16R continuous mode or continuous variation mode) set as the second number of times (for example, 16 times) is set,
Setting means for setting which of the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means executes the specific control in each of the special game states (the function of executing the process of step S1408 by the main controller 81 ),
The setting means is configured such that the first switching execution means is easy to set in the specific control in the first special game state, and the second switching execution means is easy to set in the specific control in the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, each special game state having a different number of possible continuations of the specific control is set as the special game state. It is easy to set the 1 switching executing means, and in the second special game state in which the number of times of continuation is greater than that, the 2nd switching executing means with a low passage rate to the first passing portion is easy to be set. Then, passage to the first passing portion during the special game state is grasped by the grasping means, and a second privilege is provided based on the result. By doing so, it is possible to associate the advantageous/disadvantageous relationship of the special game state with the granting of the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, thereby diversifying the game. Therefore, it becomes possible to make use of it for improvement of interest.

Feature G6. A high-advantage mode (opening/closing pattern of pattern A, relief mode, or special mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and a low-advantage mode (opening/closing pattern of patterns B and C, normal mode). is set and
The second privilege is set as the high-advantage mode or the low-advantage mode,
The second privilege granting means is
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means that the number of times the game ball passed through the first passing portion is less than a specific number of times or that the passing timing is earlier than the specific passing timing is the first grasping result. Set to the high advantage mode,
Based on the fact that the grasping result of the grasping means is the second grasping result that the number of times the game ball has passed through the first passage portion is equal to or greater than the specific number of times or the passage timing is after the specific passage timing. The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized in that it is set to an advantageous mode.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature G5, since the number of times of specific control is small in the first special game state, while it is easy to pass through the first passage part, the number of times of passage and the passage timing are the same as the second special game. can be faster than state. Therefore, in such a case, if a configuration is adopted in which the player is set to a high-advantage mode with a high degree of advantage for the player, the advantage of the first special game state in which it is easy for the player to pass through the first passing portion should be emphasized. becomes possible. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve interest.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the high-advantage mode or the low-advantage mode is set at the end of the special game state.

According to the above configuration, the high-advantage mode is easily set after the first special game state, and the low-advantage mode is easily set after the second special game state. In the first special game state, although the passage rate of the first passing portion is higher than that in the second special game state, the number of times of specific control is smaller than that in the second special game state. Therefore, if the advantage balance between the first special game state and the second special game state is configured as described above, even if the player tends to feel disadvantageous in the first special game state, it is advantageous thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation for the game.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the high-advantage mode and the low-advantage mode are set so that the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied in the high-advantage mode.

According to the above configuration, after the first special game state, the predetermined condition is satisfied again, making it easier to shift to the special game state. In this way, even in the first special game state in which the number of times of specific control is small, it is considered that the player will persevere and continue the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G9. When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, the timing ( the variable receiving means is in the first state at the first timing including the timing at which V allocation can be performed;
When the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution means, the timing ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, wherein the variable receiving means is brought into the first state at the second timing including the timing at which V allocation is difficult to perform.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage between the high-advantage mode and the low-advantage mode (special game state) can be achieved with a simple configuration such as differentiating the timing of each state switching control by the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means. transition rate) can be realized. Here, a configuration is also conceivable in which the winning probability of the transition lottery to the special game state is changed (the establishment probability of the predetermined condition is changed). However, in this case, various inconveniences may occur, such as complication of the processing configuration inside the game machine and a decrease in the player's degree of understanding. Therefore, if the transition rate of such a special game state is changed by a simple configuration in which the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means as described above is changed and the timing of the distribution means is not changed. , it is possible to diversify the game while avoiding the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

Feature G10. A ball entry portion (first operation opening 38, second operation opening 39) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
a shift determination means (function for executing right/wrong determination processing by the main controller 81) for executing shift determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined shift information; ,
Based on the transition determination by the transition determining means, a predetermined effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the predetermined effect is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. As one game round, notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing the effect processing by the effect control device 82),
Period setting means for setting the performance period of the game round (function for executing the variable display time setting process by the main control device 81);
with
The variable acceptance means executes the state switching control based on the fact that the notification control means reports, as the predetermined event, that the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the transition information. and
The sorting means is configured to switch to the first mode after a predetermined specific period has elapsed based on the fact that the special information has become the target of the shift determination,
A high-advantage mode (opening/closing pattern of pattern A, relief mode, or special mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high, and a low-advantage mode (opening/closing pattern of patterns B and C, normal mode). is set and
The second privilege is set as the high-advantage mode or the low-advantage mode,
In the high-advantage mode, the period setting means sets the timing (V distribution is The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to set the presentation period so as to be the timing at which the presentation can be performed.

According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the ball entering the ball entering section, and if the result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information, the variable receiving means is in the first state after the game round. In this case, in the high-advantage mode, in order to set the performance period of the game cycle so that when the switching of the sorting means occurs, it is easy to sort to the first passage side. Move to special game state. In this way, even in the first special game state in which the number of times of specific control is small, it is configured to be so-called continuous play, and it is very simple such as changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means. A novel game can be realized by implementing the configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Variable receiving means (role object device 150);
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (the start of a round game), variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means (execution of opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a specific passing portion (V winning path 191a) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed multiple times (eg, 19 times, RC2) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, is performed multiple times (eg, 16 times, RC1) ), a game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over a period of time;
with
In the specific control, a high-advantage control mode and a low-advantage control mode with different timings of the state switching control are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low,
In the special game state, setting means for setting which of the high-advantage control mode and the low-advantage control mode the control mode of each specific control is to be executed (executing the setting process of each round by the main controller 81 function) and
In the predetermined specific control of the special game state, switching means for generating switching from the low-advantage control mode to the high-advantage control mode (function for executing each opening setting process by the main controller 81);
In the predetermined specific control, a special notification execution means (a function of executing an opening corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing special notification by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, during the special game state, the special notification is performed at the timing when the control mode of the variable receiving means is different. That is, the special notification is performed at the timing (predetermined specific control) when the control mode is switched from a low-advantage control mode with a low advantage to the player to a high-advantage control mode with a high advantage. In this way, the player will be greatly pleased when the low-advantage control mode is switched to the high-advantage control mode at the time of transition to the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H2. In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, it is possible to perform the following specific control based on the continuation condition that the game ball has passed through the specific passage part, and based on the establishment of the continuation condition. is a configuration that becomes
In the low-advantage control mode and the high-advantage control mode, the rate of establishment of the continuation condition is varied by varying the mode of the state switching control of the variable acceptance means, and the level of the advantage is set. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that it has a

According to the above configuration, the low-advantage control mode and the high-advantage control mode are realized by the level of the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state, and the level of the continuation rate is determined by the state switching control of the variable receiving means. It is realized by the mode. In this way, the original enjoyment of the game machine is preserved, such as whether or not the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and whether or not the game ball passes through the specific passing portion. , the diversification of games can be achieved by making them expect special notification by a predetermined notification means.

Feature H3. The special game state includes a first special game state in which switching from the low-advantage control mode to the high-advantage control mode can occur in the predetermined specific control, and the switching occurs in the predetermined specific control. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein a second special game state is set.

According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether the generated special game state is the first special game state or the second special game state, and furthermore, it is the first special game state (switched to the high advantageous control mode). expected to be replaced). As a result, it is thought that the degree of attention to the predetermined specific control will increase, and the interest in the special notification will also increase. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H4. In the first special game state, state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the specific control before the predetermined specific control from the start of the first special game state,
In the second special game state, in the specific control prior to the predetermined specific control from the start of the second special game state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature H3.

According to the above configuration, from the start of the special game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the first and second special game states from the control mode of the variable receiving means. Therefore, expectations for the special notification at the time of the predetermined specific control are heightened.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, characterized in that the second special game state is set to have a higher probability of being selected than the first special game state as the special game state.

According to the above configuration, even if the player shifts to the special game state, the player may think that it is the second special game state, and the degree of attention may decrease. At such a timing, a special notification is executed to switch to a high-advantage control mode (in fact, it was a first special game state). It becomes possible.

Feature H6. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching means is performed at a specific number of times (RC2=11) of each state switching control in the predetermined specific control.

According to the above configuration, switching from the low-advantage control mode to the high-advantage control mode occurs during the specific control (at the specific number of times of the state switching control performed a plurality of times). By doing so, it is possible to expect that the above switching will occur for each specific control performed multiple times in the special game state, and it is possible to increase interest in each specific control. .

Feature H7. The specific control includes a first specific control (pattern F) in which switching from the low-advantage control mode to the high-advantage control mode can occur, and a second specific control (pattern C) in which the switching does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature H6, characterized in that , is set.

According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether each specific control in the special game state is the first specific control or the second specific control. things). As a result, it is thought that the degree of attention to the predetermined specific control will increase, and the interest in the special notification will also increase. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H8. In the first specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control before the specific number of state switching controls from the start of the first specific control,
Characteristic feature H7, wherein in the second specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the specific number of state switching controls from the start of the second specific control. game machine.

According to the above configuration, from the start of each specific control in the special game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the first and second specific controls from the control mode of the variable receiving means. Therefore, expectations for the special notification for the specific number of times are heightened.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A first mode of distributing game balls flowing down the game area in a first direction and a second mode of distributing the game balls in a second direction different from the first direction at a predetermined timing. dividing means (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310);
A second distribution means (open/close accessory 168) and
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established, grasping means for grasping whether the first sorting means is in the first mode or the second mode (the processing of step S2105 by the main controller 81 is function) and
Setting means for setting the mode of switching between the third mode and the fourth mode of the second sorting means based on the grasping result by the grasping means (the processing of steps S2107 to S2114 by the main controller 81 is function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the first sorting means switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing, and the second sorting means responds to the mode of the first sorting means. A switching mode is set. In other words, the first distribution means that performs a constant action and the second distribution means that performs an irregular action are linked. Thereby, it is possible to associate a plurality of distribution means, namely, the first distribution means and the second distribution means, which change the flowing direction of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the game balls flow down, and to improve the entertainment.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the first distribution means is provided on the downstream side of the second distribution means in the flow path of the game balls.

According to the above configuration, controlling the second sorting means also controls the first sorting means on the downstream side. Therefore, while simplifying the control configuration, it is possible to diversify the manner in which game balls flow down using a plurality of sorting means.

Feature I3. A predetermined passing portion (V winning opening 182a) is provided on the downstream side of the first sorting means in the downflow path of the game ball,
Privilege granting means (game state transition processing by main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, open/close execution mode or round continuation) to the player based on the game ball passing through the predetermined passing portion The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, the player can obtain a privilege when the game ball passes through the predetermined passing portion after being sorted by each sorting means. In this case, one of the sorting means arranged on the upstream side of the predetermined passing portion can operate regularly, and the other can operate irregularly. While the fairness of the game is ensured by the distribution means side (first distribution means side), the distribution means side (second distribution means side) in which irregular actions are performed determines the grant rate of the privilege. can be adjusted. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature I4. The first sorting means and the second sorting means are arranged such that the route from the first sorting means is shorter than the route from the second sorting means as the flow-down route to the predetermined passing portion. The game machine according to feature I3, characterized in that the position with the means is set.

According to the above configuration, the sorting means on the side where the regular operation is performed is arranged at a position closer to the predetermined passing portion. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a sense of unfairness.

Feature I5. The flow-down route of the game ball is determined so that the game ball can reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of whether the game ball is distributed in either the first direction or the second direction by the first distribution means. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or feature I4.

According to the above configuration, even if regular distribution is performed by the first distribution means, it is possible to reach the predetermined passing portion, so fairness in the game can be easily ensured.

In addition, in order to clarify the significance of distribution by the first distribution means,
As a configuration, "the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is set to be relatively high or low depending on whether the distribution is in the first direction or the second direction." good too.

Feature I6. The rate of arrival at the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high or low depending on whether the distribution is in the first direction or in the second direction,
The setting means is configured to set the second sorting means so that the first sorting means sorts in a direction having a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion based on the result of grasping by the grasping means. The game machine according to feature I5, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player will be pleased if the ball is distributed to the side with the higher arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. On the other hand, as described in feature I5, since it is possible to reach the predetermined passing section regardless of the direction of distribution, if the distribution is to the side with the higher arrival rate, it will not reach the predetermined passing section. The enjoyment of watching the action mode of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, by setting the distribution by the second distribution means as described above, it is possible to fully enjoy the game whether or not a privilege can be obtained depending on the action mode of the game ball.

Feature I7. The side with a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passage section is set to have higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side with a higher arrival rate to the predetermined passage section. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more effectively exhibit the enjoyment of watching the motion of the game ball.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A variable receiving means ( Accessory device 150),
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (function for executing game control processing by the main control device 81);
a first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81);
A game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side in a first mode (a position where it is easy to lead out to the V winning side by the rotating body 201), and the first mode is more likely than the first mode. A second mode in which it is difficult to distribute to the passage side (a position where it is easy to lead out to the outside side by the rotating body 201), a distributing means (rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
grasping means for grasping the state of switching between the first mode and the second mode by grasping the sorting means (function for executing the processing of step S2105 by the main controller 81);
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established (the occurrence of a ball entering the operation openings 38, 39, the end of the waiting time for opening, the end of the variable display time, etc.), the result of grasping by the grasping means is taken into consideration. Then, a game state transition means (main A function of executing game control processing by the control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is established, the state switching control is performed to enable acceptance by the variable acceptance means. When the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, the comprehension means comprehends the state of the sorting member that affects whether or not the first passage portion is passed, and the state switching control is performed in consideration of the comprehension result of this comprehension means. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it easier to pass through the first passage portion, and it is possible to make it difficult to pass through the first passage portion. Therefore, the ball is put out as designed by the gaming machine designer, and the ball putting rate can be managed appropriately.

Feature J2. The game state transition means is
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the first timing (V distribution is A first state switching control mode (opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 that makes the timing at which V allocation is likely to be performed) to put the variable receiving means in the first state so as to include the timing that can be performed); ,
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the second timing (V distribution is A second state switching control mode (opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 that makes the timing difficult to perform V allocation) in which the variable receiving means is set to the first state so as to include a timing that is difficult to perform); ,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the specific state including any of the above.

According to the above configuration, based on the grasping result by the grasping means, whether or not the game ball is distributed to the first passing portion side is taken into account such as the period required for the game ball received by the variable receiving means to reach the distribution means. be done. In this way, the ball can be hit more exactly as designed by the designer.

Feature J3. The grasping means grasps the position of the sorting means or the period from the previous switching timing (result of detection by the rotational position detection sensor 196) to determine the state of switching between the first mode and the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that it is configured to be able to comprehend.

According to the above configuration, the grasping means can obtain the excellent effect of J1 with a simple structure such as grasping the position of the sorting means or the period from the previous switching timing of the sorting means.

Feature J4. The grasping means, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to grasp the mode of the sorting means at the timing of reaching the sorting means.

According to the above configuration, even if the game ball is received at any timing during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the mode of the distribution means is changed at the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the distribution rate by the distribution means.

Feature J5. The sorting means has a rotating body that rotates at least at a predetermined cycle,
The grasping means has a detection sensor that detects the position of the rotating body, and is configured to be able to grasp the position of at least the rotating body based on the detection result of the detecting sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect described in J1 above by suitably using a conventional configuration.

Feature J6. The distribution means has a first distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution means (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution means,
The first sorting means is arranged upstream of the second sorting means,
The first passing portion and the second passing portion are arranged downstream of the second sorting means,
The grasping means is configured to be able to grasp any position of the first distribution means and the second distribution means or a period from the previous switching timing, while regarding the first distribution means, The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the grasping result of the second sorting means is prioritized over the grasping result of .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine the sorting situation at a position closer to the first passage section or the second passage section by prioritizing the grasping result on the downstream side. As a result, it becomes possible to set the state switching control of the variable receiving means more accurately taking into account the award rate of the privilege based on the passage through the first passage section.

Feature J7. The distribution means has a first distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution means (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution means,
The first sorting means is arranged upstream of the second sorting means,
The first passing portion and the second passing portion are arranged downstream of the second sorting means,
When the game balls are distributed by the first distribution means, the game balls can be led out to the first passing portion without going through the second distribution means,
Even when the grasping means grasps that the first sorting means can sort to the first passing portion side, the first mode and the second mode of the second sorting means The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized by grasping the switching situation.

According to the above configuration, even if the first sorting means can sort to the first passing section side, if the situation of the second sorting means is grasped, the state switching control of the variable receiving means can be performed. Regarding the setting, it is possible to reflect the situation of the second sorting means. By doing so, it is possible to set more diverse state switching control.

Feature J8. The distribution means has a first distribution means (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution means (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution means,
The second sorting means is arranged at a position with higher visibility from the player than the first sorting means,
The game state transition means, when it is grasped by the grasping means that it can be distributed to the first passing portion side by either the first distribution means or the second distribution means, the second distribution means The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that the state switching control can be set so as to be distributed to the first passing section side by dividing means.

According to the above configuration, the player can confirm the sorting by the sorting means (second sorting means) with higher visibility. Therefore, it is not a point of view that it suffices to simply let the ball pass through the first passing portion (it is sufficient if a privilege is given), but it is based on the original enjoyment of the game machine, such as enjoying the action of the game ball, and the wonderful feature J1 is considered. It becomes possible to produce an effect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
Distributing means (opening/closing accessory 168) capable of switching between a first mode of distributing game balls flowing down the game area in a first direction and a second mode of distributing in a second direction different from the first direction. and,
A predetermined passing portion (V winning opening 182a) provided downstream of the sorting means in the downflow path of the game ball;
Privilege granting means (game state transition processing by main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, open/close execution mode or round continuation) to the player based on the game ball passing through the predetermined passing portion function) and
with
A flow-down route of the game ball is determined so that the game ball can reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of whether the game ball is distributed in the first direction or the second direction by the distribution means,
The rate of arrival at the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high or low depending on whether the distribution is in the first direction or in the second direction,
Means for changing so that when the distribution means distributes to the side with the higher arrival rate to the predetermined passage section, the distribution is changed to the side with the lower arrival rate to the predetermined passage section (first by the main controller 81) 2 function of executing opening/closing timing change processing).

According to the above configuration, a privilege is given to the player by passing the game ball through the predetermined passage portion, and the distribution means is provided upstream of the predetermined passage portion, and the distribution direction is determined by the distribution direction. The flow-down route is set so that the rate of arrival at a predetermined passage portion is relatively high or low. In such a configuration, it is conceivable that the player desires to be sorted to the side with a higher arrival rate to the predetermined passing section. However, if it is possible to reach the predetermined passage no matter which route is distributed, the distribution to the side with the lower arrival rate to the predetermined passage indicates whether or not the vehicle reaches the predetermined passage. It is possible to enjoy a thrilling feeling. In that respect, if there is a means for changing the distribution to the low side when the arrival rate is high as in the above configuration, it is possible to fully enjoy the falling of such game balls. It is possible to use it to improve interest.

Feature K2. The side with a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passage section is set to have higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side with a higher arrival rate to the predetermined passage section. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more effectively exhibit the enjoyment of watching the motion of the game ball.

In addition to the above-mentioned background problems, the following feature group is that "game machines such as pachinko machines generally have a variable ball entry device provided in a game area where game balls flow or roll. Also, there is known a variable ball entry device in which a game ball flows down or rolls (see, for example, Patent Document 1). However, there is still room for improvement.”

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball based on a player's shooting operation;
Distributing means (second 1 distribution member 300, second distribution member 310),
grasping means for grasping the passage of the ball on each of the paths (function for executing the passage area processing by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the gauge structure in which the game ball shot by the shooting means is distributed to a plurality of paths from a predetermined location, the grasping means grasps which path it has passed through. Here, in a general gaming machine, entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry portion is detected, and processing such as fraud detection is performed based on such entry detection information. For example, for an act of detecting as if a ball has entered a predetermined ball-entering section even though the ball has not actually entered a certain ball-entering section, the ball-entering detection information based on the actual ball-entering section is used. Anti-fraud measures have been taken that focus on the difference between the information detected by entering the ball and the information obtained by fraudulent acts. However, for example, the act of intentionally guiding the game ball so that the game ball is likely to enter the predetermined ball entry part is actually entering the game ball. Conventional anti-fraud measures such as Therefore, as in the above configuration, if this comprehension result is used as a configuration for comprehending which route has been passed, it is possible to greatly contribute to fraud detection and the like.

Feature L2. A calculation means (a function of executing calculation processing by the main controller 81) capable of calculating the ball passing situation (passing rate) for each path based on the plurality of ball passing results grasped by the grasping means is provided. The game machine according to feature L1 characterized by:

According to the above configuration, if it is possible to know not only the ball passing result such as which route the ball passed through, but also the ball passing situation for each route, it is possible to grasp information such as which route is actually easier to pass. can. In this way, for example, in a gauge configuration designed so that each route has a different ease of passage, fraud can be detected based on the difference from the design.

Feature L3. A number measuring means for measuring the number of game balls shot by the shooting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2608 by the main controller 81),
The calculation means is configured to be capable of calculating, as the ball passing situation, the passage rate of each of the paths with respect to the number of shots measured by the number counting means, based on the result of the ball passing. The gaming machine according to feature L2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the passage rate of each route with respect to the number of shots actually shot. As the passage rate of each route, for example, the passage rate per unit time can be considered, but if the passage rate per unit time is simply calculated, the period in which the game ball is not actually fired is also taken into account. There is a possibility that the calculation processing will be complicated, such as excluding cases where the player changes or plays a stopping shot. On the other hand, it is preferable to set it to the number of shots, because it does not lead to such complication of arithmetic processing.

In addition, with the above configuration, it is possible to easily discover cheating that induces false detection as if the game ball had passed through each path without being shot. This is because if such a fraudulent act is performed, the game ball is not shot, and the passing rate is considered to be abnormally high.

Feature L4. A predetermined ball entry portion (first operation opening 38, second operation opening 39, V winning opening 182a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
a detection sensor (first actuation sensor 38a, second actuation sensor 39c, V winning sensor 192) that detects that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion;
with
The calculating means is capable of calculating, as the ball passing situation, the passage rate of each path with respect to the number of balls entering the ball entering portion using the detection result of the detection sensor, based on the ball passing result. The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the passage rate of each path for a ball entering the ball entering portion. For example, the number of balls entering the ball-entering section and the number of balls entering the ball-entering section and the number of balls entering the ball-entering section are determined based on the number of balls entering the ball-entering section and the number of balls entering each route. If the passage status is closely related, it can be said that it is highly significant to grasp the passage rate of each route with respect to the number of balls entering the ball entering section.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the predetermined location is arranged at a position where a game ball can reach when the ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion, the game ball can reach a predetermined location, and is distributed to any route from there. In this case, as a stage before the ball passage is grasped by the grasping means, the ball has entered a predetermined ball-entering portion. If it is found that the ball has passed, or if the number of balls that have passed through each path is greater than the number of balls that have entered a predetermined ball-entering section, there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality, fraud, or other inconvenience has occurred. Therefore, if the passing rate for the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion is grasped as in the feature L4, the game machine side can grasp the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through at least one of the paths can reach.

According to the above configuration, if the passage rate of each route is grasped, it becomes obvious which route the player is following to reach the predetermined ball-entering portion. For example, in a gauge configuration where the arrival rate to a predetermined ball entry part differs depending on the route, the arrival rate may be low in the actual calculation result even though the delivery rate is high in design, or the arrival rate may be If the arrival rate is high as a result of arithmetic processing even though the route is low, there is a possibility that some inconvenience such as an abnormality or dishonesty has occurred. Therefore, if the passing rate for the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion is grasped as in the feature L4, the game machine side can grasp the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature L7. Characteristic features L1 to L6 characterized by comprising an output means (function for executing output processing by the main controller 81) for outputting information corresponding to the ball passing result grasped by the grasping means to the outside of the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the information corresponding to the ball passing result can be grasped outside the gaming machine, for example, by a management computer of the gaming hall. In this way, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can confirm whether there is an abnormality in the gaming machine or whether there is any fraudulent act based on the information corresponding to the ball passing result. becomes possible. In particular, the information grasped by the grasping means is the information that the game ball has passed through the path that the game ball should originally pass, so it is often difficult to identify the occurrence of an abnormality or fraudulent act only from this information. . Even if an error notification is given to indicate the possibility of an abnormality or a fraudulent act, the uncertainty may hinder the smooth progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently identify the occurrence of an abnormality or a fraudulent act by entrusting the final confirmation to an external device or the manager of the game hall, etc., instead of simply reporting the error.

Feature L8. The grasping means is a stationary grasping means capable of grasping that a game ball stays on the path for a predetermined period or more (processing for storing the corresponding ball clogging flag in the detection processing of each passing area by the main controller 81). with
Characteristic L1 characterized by comprising a first notification means (function for executing error processing based on ball clogging state by production control device 82) that executes first notification based on the grasping result by the stationary grasping means. The game machine according to any one of L7.

According to the above configuration, when ball clogging occurs in the path to be grasped by the grasping means, the first notification is made. Here, the ball clogging of the game ball may occur in the ball entry portion where the game ball enters, or may occur in a location different from the ball entry portion. When ball clogging occurs in the ball-entering section, the game ball cannot be entered into the ball-entering section, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. In addition, even if a ball clogging occurs in the passage path to the ball-entering portion as a location different from the ball-entering portion, the game ball cannot pass from that location to the ball-entering portion, which is also disadvantageous to the player. can lead to In these cases, in the conventional gaming machine in which a detection sensor is provided in the ball-entering portion, it is possible to grasp the ball-clogging in the ball-entering portion, but it is difficult to grasp the ball-clogging occurring in a place different from the ball-entering portion. can't Also, for example, if a ball clogging occurs in one of a plurality of paths, the game balls are likely to be distributed to a path different from the one path in which the ball clogging has occurred, and as a result, Not only the player but also the game hall can be disadvantaged. Therefore, as described in the feature L1, if a grasping means capable of grasping the passage of game balls in each path is provided, ball jamming that occurs at a location (each path) different from the ball entry section can also be grasped. Furthermore, if it is configured to notify it as the first notification, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to quickly perform the work to eliminate the ball clogging, and the inconvenience that the player and the game hall suffer. Profits can be mitigated.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to the feature L7, the grasping result of the grasping means may be output to the outside of the game machine by the output means, or may be notified as the first notification. In this case, the ball clogging is a clear abnormality (error), and the phenomenon is also a phenomenon that can be visually grasped by the player. If the occurrence of this clogging of balls causes a disadvantage to the player, the player himself/herself may call the manager of the game hall or the like, but there is no disadvantage (it is advantageous) for the player. If there is, some players may not call the manager or the like. In other words, if the gaming machine (or gaming hall) does not identify this state, it is conceivable that the player will continue the game as it is. On the other hand, since the jammed balls are not necessarily caused by a fraudulent act, it is considered excessive to regard the act of continuing the game as it is as a fraudulent act. Therefore, if the output means outputs information corresponding to the result of grasping by the grasping means, and the game machine itself can notify the clogged balls, the manager of the game hall can respond quickly. In addition to prompting the player, it is possible to let the player know that the game machine has grasped the occurrence of the ball clogging, and it is possible to deter the above-mentioned actions.

Feature L9. A passage portion (V winning opening 182a) arranged downstream of at least one of the paths and through which game balls can pass;
A detection means (V winning sensor 192) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the passing portion;
A second notification is executed based on the fact that the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means even though the passage of the ball is not grasped on any of the paths by the grasping means. Notification means (function for executing processing corresponding to the V error state by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the second notification is performed when the vehicle passes through the passing portion disposed downstream of each route without passing through each route. For example, in a configuration in which there are no paths to the passage other than each path, an event in which passage of this passage is detected is clearly an anomaly. Therefore, when such an event occurs, the second notification is performed. It is possible to take prompt action by Therefore, it is possible to use the results of grasping by the grasping means to vary the coping method for each event, and to appropriately deal with each event.

Feature L10. A passage portion (V prize opening 182a) capable of awarding a privilege to the player based on the passage of the game ball is arranged downstream of at least one of the paths. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L9.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified by the grasping result of the grasping means which route has been followed to reach the passing section where the privilege can be given. Here, from the viewpoint of discovering fraudulent acts aimed at fraudulently obtaining benefits, it is common technical sense to think that it is sufficient to check passing sections that are the direct triggers for obtaining benefits. However, it is not always the case that the fraudulent act is carried out on the passage portion concerned, and there are cases where it is not clear whether or not the act is fraudulent only by checking the passage portion as in the conventional art. In particular, in a game machine designed to increase the interest of a game by diversifying the flow path of a game ball to the passage section, the diversified flow path is taken advantage of, and an abnormal path is followed to the passage section. It is also conceivable that an act that intentionally increases the passing rate to the passing section, such as passing through to the passing section. Therefore, if it is possible to grasp the passage of each route as described in the feature L1, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the fraud check.

Feature L11. The gaming machine according to feature L10, further comprising detection means (V winning sensor 192) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the passing portion.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the grasping means in the feature L1 and the conventional detecting means provided in the passing portion where the privilege can be given becomes clearer.

In addition to detecting the passage of game balls, the detecting means can detect ball clogging in the passing section, detect radio waves applied to the passing section, and detect the passing section. It may be a device capable of detecting applied magnetism, or the like, and these may be collectively expressed as detection means capable of detecting a predetermined event.

Feature L12. a role device (a role device 150) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter;
The predetermined location is arranged at a position where a game ball entering the accessory device can reach,
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L11, wherein the distribution means distributes game balls that have entered the accessory device to a plurality of paths in the accessory device.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball entering the accessory device is distributed to each path by the distribution means, passage of each path is grasped by the grasping means. In other words, the content grasped by the grasping means is the content regarding the distribution destination of the game ball that entered the accessory device. In particular, with regard to the accessory device having the allocation means, the privilege granted to the player often differs greatly depending on the allocation destination. It is possible to accurately grasp information such as whether or not a privilege has been given by being distributed to the . Some of such accessory devices have, for example, a passing portion called a V-winning gate (V-zone), and some have a plurality of routes leading to the V-winning gate. Also, in general, when a game ball passes through the V winning hole, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, according to the configuration of feature L1, it becomes a configuration for grasping the route leading to the V winning opening, and it is possible to grasp the information as to which route leads to the V winning opening. In this way, it is possible to perform processing based on the path leading to the V winning opening in the accessory device. The processing based on the route leading to the V winning gate is, for example, when a route that is rarely passed is frequently passed, or a route with a high arrival rate to the V winning gate is passed at an abnormal rate. is judged to be abnormal, and processing for judging it as abnormal and notifying it. As described above, it is possible to appropriately grasp and manage the information of the passage route after the ball enters the accessory device.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A passage portion (left passage area 412, right passage area 413, back passage area 414, V winning opening 182a, etc.) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass;
Passage detection means (left passage detection sensor 402, right passage detection sensor 403, back passage detection sensor 404, V winning sensor 192, etc.) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the passage portion;
A calculation means (a function for executing calculation processing by the main controller 81) that executes a predetermined calculation process using the detection result based on the passage detection means;
Output means for outputting the calculation result of the calculation means to another device (function for executing output processing by the main control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game ball is shot toward the game area based on the shooting operation by the player, and when the game ball passes through the passing portion, it is detected by the passage detecting means. Then, using the detection result, predetermined arithmetic processing is performed, and then the arithmetic result is output to another device. Other devices include, for example, a data display device provided in a game hall, a hall computer in a game hall, and a sub-side control device for displaying, etc., possessed by the game machine. If these other devices can grasp the above calculation results, for example, the passing rate per unit time may differ greatly from the design of the game machine, or the passing rate of other ball entering sections or passing sections / It becomes possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily grasp that the relationship with the passage rate is different from the design. If an event different from the above design occurs, for example, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out or a malfunction (ball jam, etc.) on the gaming machine side occurs. If it is possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp it, it will be possible to quickly eliminate these phenomena.

In addition, in the feature M1, separately from the "output means", "output means (main controller 81 function to execute the process of step S401 by the above-mentioned "other device", the information output after the predetermined arithmetic processing is performed, and the information output after the predetermined arithmetic processing is performed, It is possible to grasp the information to be output. In this case, the ``output means for outputting the calculation result to another device'' is replaced by ``first output means'', and the ``output means for outputting to another device without executing the predetermined arithmetic processing'' is replaced by ``second output means''. When expressed as "output means", each output means is more clearly distinguished. Here, conventional game machines generally include output means (second output means) for outputting without performing predetermined arithmetic processing. If the configuration includes the first output means for outputting the calculation result of the processing, the effect of the first output means can be obtained without making a large change to the existing configuration. Also, in other devices as well, it is sufficient to select whether to use the information from the first output means as before or to use the information from the second output means. No major changes required. In addition, in the case where the first output means performs arithmetic processing on the gaming machine side and outputs the result, for example, an error occurs in the arithmetic processing (bug in the arithmetic program, etc.). , If the raw data (information from the second output means) is grasped by another device, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the error on the other device side, and to improve the accuracy of data management. becomes possible.

Moreover, the feature M1 can be expressed as follows.
"shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls toward the game area based on the player's shooting operation;
Passing parts (left passing area 412, right passing area 413, back passing area 414) through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass;
Passage detection means (left passage detection sensor 402, right passage detection sensor 403, back passage detection sensor 404) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the passage portion;
an output means (function for executing output processing by the main controller 81) for outputting to another device a calculation result using the detection result based on the passage detection means;
A game machine characterized by comprising a

Feature M2. Comparison means for comparing the calculation result of the calculation means with a predetermined set value (design value) (function of executing comparison processing by main control device 81, function of executing comparison processing of raw data by production control device 82 ), the gaming machine according to feature M1.

According to the above configuration, the calculation result can be compared with the set value. The set value may be, for example, the designed pass rate of the game machine, the upper limit value/lower limit value of the fluctuation range of the pass rate, etc. It differs depending on whether the passing rate is to be calculated, or whether to calculate the relationship between the passing rate/ball entering rate to another passing portion/ball entering portion, etc.). By comparing such a value with the calculation result of the calculation means, it is possible to clearly determine whether or not the phenomenon actually occurring in the game machine is as designed.

Feature M3. The game according to feature M2, wherein the output means is capable of outputting the comparison result of the comparison means.

According to the above configuration, since the comparison result is output, other devices can use the received contents as they are to determine whether or not the set values are met. Therefore, the processing load on other devices can be reduced. In this case as well, if a second output means for outputting raw data is provided in addition to the output means (first output means), the comparison result can also be compared with the raw data. This enables more accurate data management.

Feature M4. a first controller (main controller 81) having at least the computing means and the output means;
A second control device (production control device 82) capable of receiving information output from the output means;
with
The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the comparison means is provided in the second control device.

According to the above configuration, the processing load can be distributed by performing the processing by the effecting means and the output means and the processing by the comparing means by separate control devices.

Feature M5. A ball entry section (V winning opening 182a) into which a game ball that has passed through the predetermined passage section can enter;
Ball entry detection means (V winning sensor 192) for detecting that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the privilege is given when the game ball enters the ball entering portion after passing through the predetermined passing portion, the object (data) to be calculated by the calculating means is the object (data) that has passed through the predetermined passing portion. It is data and is different from the ball entry data to the ball entry section. The passing data of the passing portion is data before the ball enters the ball, and is information passed through the passing portion before the ball actually enters the ball entering portion. Entered ball data may also include those entered without passing through the passing section. By doing so, it is possible to obtain information such as what kind of route the player is taking to reach the ball-entry section by performing calculations using the passage data of the passage section provided as the route to the ball-entry section. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of data management.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "privilege granting means" is defined as "granting a privilege to a player based on the detection of a game ball by the entering ball detection means, and providing a privilege to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the passing detection means If we express it as "privilege granting means that does not grant a privilege to a player by passing through the passing part", etc., and clarify that a privilege is not granted based on passing through the "passing part", the significance of using the entering data and the passing data separately can be made clearer.

Further, the "privileges" provided by the "privilege providing means" include, for example, a predetermined number of prize balls, generating a special state advantageous to the player, and whether or not to generate a special state. It shall also include conducting a lottery.

Feature M6. Equipped with means for executing game progress processing for progressing the game (function for executing normal processing by the main control device 81),
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, wherein the detection result by the passage detection means is used for the predetermined arithmetic processing without being used for the game progress processing.

According to the above configuration, the detection result by the passage detection means is not used for the game progress processing, so even if the predetermined passage portion is passed, the progress of the game is not affected. For example, if it is the data for the ball entry part used for the game progress process, it is sufficient to grasp the occurrence of an error etc. in the game progress process, but for the data that is not used for the game progress process , it is necessary to grasp the occurrence of the error in the game progress processing, or separately grasp the occurrence of the error. However, data that is not used in the game progress process is considered to be data that has little or no relation to the game progress in the first place. Attempting to grasp this may lead to an increase in the amount of game progress processing. In particular, it is often not possible to detect the occurrence of an error in data that is not directly related to the progress of a game. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the occurrence of an error is grasped by performing a separate calculation process on such data, it is possible to manage the passing data of the passing portion within a range that does not adversely affect the processing for progressing the game.

Feature M7. A ball entry section (V winning opening 182a) into which a game ball that has passed through the predetermined passage section can enter;
ball entry detection means (V winning sensor 192) for detecting that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81);
with
Having a first passing portion (back passing region 414) and a second passing portion (left passing region 412) as the predetermined passing portion,
As the passage detection means, the first passage section is provided with a first passage detection section, and the second passage section is provided with a second passage detection section,
The arithmetic means can execute the predetermined arithmetic processing using detection results of the first passage detection means and the second passage detection means,
The flow-down path from the first passing portion and the second passing portion to the entering ball portion is such that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion is more likely than the game ball that has passed through the second passing portion to enter the ball. The game machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, wherein the game machine is formed so as to be easily accessible to the part.

According to the above configuration, the first passage portion and the second passage portion are provided as the predetermined passage portions, and the ball passing through the first passage portion goes to the ball entering portion after passing through the second passage portion. In the configuration that allows easy access, predetermined arithmetic processing is performed using the detection result of passing through the first passing portion and the detection result of passing through the second passing portion. In this way, in a configuration in which each passing portion has a different reaching rate to the ball-entering portion, it is considered that the passing rate of each passing portion is designed according to the level of the reaching rate. For example, the passing rate of the side with a low reaching rate to the ball entering section (second passing section) is increased, and the passing rate of the side with a high reaching rate (first passing section) is decreased. In this case, as the data obtained by the arithmetic processing, for example, if the actual passing rate of the first passing section is abnormally higher than the designed one, the benefit based on the ball entering the ball entering section is intentionally There is a possibility that fraudulent activities are being carried out in an attempt to obtain In addition, as data obtained by arithmetic processing, for example, if the passage rate of the second passage portion is abnormally lower than the designed one, there is some inconvenience (ball clogging, etc.) that the second passage portion cannot be passed. may have occurred. Therefore, if the passage rate of each passage section is calculated by arithmetic processing in relation to these arrival rates, it will be possible to more quickly discover the occurrence of fraudulent acts and inconveniences, and the accuracy of data management will be improved. It becomes possible.

Feature M8. Any of a first lead-out mode of leading to the first passing section and a second lead-out mode of leading to the second passing section provided upstream of the first passing section and the second passing section. Distributing means (second distributing member 310) for distributing the reached game ball to either the first passing portion or the second passing portion by switching to the mode of The gaming machine described in M7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to ascertain the distribution rate to which passing section the distribution means distributes by referring to the passing rate of each passing section. The sorting means is configured to be switchable between the first derivation mode and the second derivation mode. It can be a distribution ratio different from In this case, the rate of arrival at the entrance portion will differ from the designed one. Therefore, for example, if the data obtained by arithmetic processing is used as data that can determine whether or not the passing rate of each passing section is as designed, it is possible to indirectly determine whether or not the sorting means is operating normally. can be grasped by the passage rate. Therefore, for example, in order to determine whether or not the mode of the sorting means is switched normally, there is no need to grasp the position of the sorting means in detail, and the detection sensor can be simplified/omitted. can be done.

Feature M9. Special notification execution means capable of receiving the calculation result of the calculation means and executing special notification corresponding to the received calculation result by a predetermined notification means (a function of executing error processing by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible for a manager or the like of the game hall to grasp the calculation result of the predetermined calculation processing by means of the special notification performed by the notification means of the gaming machine. As a result, the content of the special notification can be grasped by comparing it with the content and situation of the game, and the convenience of the data can be improved.

Feature M10. time management means for managing time (RTC counter in RAM 144);
Predetermined effect executing means (function for executing RTC effect processing by the effect control device 82) for executing a predetermined effect based on the predetermined time being reached by the time management means;
with
The special notification execution means is capable of executing the special notification by performing a restriction process (error notification process) that does not allow the predetermined effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect or changes the execution timing of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature M9, characterized in that it has a configuration of

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is an effect that is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. When this happens, all the game machines of the same type will perform a predetermined performance, and it is possible to make a flashy performance as if the performance is performed all at once while being linked with other game machines. On the premise that such a predetermined effect is set, as a special notification, if it is configured to perform a restriction process such as not to execute the predetermined effect or to change the execution timing, the limit process It is possible to clearly grasp that the game has been performed in relation to other game machines.

Here, if there is a high possibility that an event such as a malfunction or error (ball clogging, etc.) has occurred on the gaming machine side, or an event involving fraudulent acts has occurred, the administrator of the gaming hall, etc. It is thought that a flashy notification should be given by sound or light so that people can quickly grasp the situation. However, in a game machine in which a wide variety of effects are set, no matter how flashy an announcement is made, it may be difficult to distinguish it from other effects. In addition, even if it is possible to grasp the flashy notification by seeing it near the game machine, it is difficult to grasp it even if the flashy notification is seen from the edge of the island facility of the hall. be done. In other words, no matter how flashy the notification may be, there is a possibility that it may be overlooked because it is buried in the effects of other game machines in the game hall these days when many other effects are set to be flashy. However, there is a limit to making the notification from the game machine more flashy. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if the restriction processing of the predetermined effect performed at the same timing is performed in the gaming machine of the same type, the gaming machine stands out in relation to the other gaming machines of the same type, and the restriction processing is performed. You can clearly see what is happening.

In particular, compared to cases where ball clogging actually occurs or fraudulent acts due to magnets or vibrations are performed, this configuration has a certain degree of possibility that these events have occurred, so it is possible to quickly notify Sex is not considered to be required. Therefore, it is conceivable that there will be no problem even if the special notification is made to wait until the predetermined time is reached, as described above.

Feature M11. A number measuring means for measuring the number of game balls shot by the shooting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2608 by the main controller 81),
The calculating means is configured to be capable of calculating, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, the passage rate of the passing section, which is the number of shots detected by the passage detecting means with respect to the number of shots measured by the number measuring means. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features M1 to M10.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the passage rate of the passage portion with respect to the number of shots actually shot as the result of calculation by the calculation means. As the passing rate of the passing part, for example, the passing rate per unit time can be considered, but if the passing rate per unit time is simply calculated, the game ball will actually be fired. There is a possibility that the period in which the game is not played may be taken into consideration, and there is a concern that the arithmetic processing will become complicated, such as excluding the cases where the player takes turns or stops. On the other hand, it is preferable to set it to the number of shots, because it does not lead to such complication of arithmetic processing.

In addition, with the above configuration, it is possible to easily discover cheating that induces false detection as if the game ball had passed through the passing portion without being shot. This is because if such a fraudulent act is performed, the game ball is not shot, and the passing rate is considered to be abnormally high.

Feature M12. Provided in the game area, provided with a starting ball entry portion (first operation opening 38, second operation opening 39) capable of entering a game ball,
The passing portion is configured to allow passage of the game ball based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering portion,
1. Any one of the features M1 to M11, wherein the calculating means is capable of calculating a passing rate, which is the number of balls detected by the passing detecting means with respect to the number of balls entering the starting ball entering portion. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to ascertain the passage rate of the passing portion with respect to the ball entering the starting ball entering portion as the result of calculation by the calculating means. Since the passing portion is configured to allow the passage based on the ball entering the starting ball entering portion, if the above is performed, the passing portion is allowed to pass without the ball entering the starting ball entering portion. Fraud can be easily detected. This is because if such a fraudulent act has been carried out, it is considered that the passing rate will be abnormally high because the ball has not been entered into the starting ball entering section.

Feature M13. A special state (opening/closing execution mode) is set in which the passing rate to the passing portion is higher than that in the normal game state,
The game according to any one of features M1 to M12, wherein the arithmetic means is configured to be capable of performing the arithmetic processing without using the detection result of the passage detection means during the special state. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to calculate and output only the passing information during the normal game state without using the passing information during the special state in which the passing rate of the passing portion is improved as data for arithmetic processing. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately grasp the pass rate (processing result of the arithmetic processing).

With the above configuration, the data during the special state and the data during the normal game state can be grasped separately.

"A special state (opening and closing execution mode) is set in which the passing rate to the passing section is higher than that in the normal game state,
The computing means includes first computing means for performing the computing process based on the detection result of the passage detecting means during the special state, and the computing process based on the detection result of the passage detecting means during the normal game state. and a second computing means for performing

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a player's shooting operation;
A first passage portion (V winning opening 182a) and a second passage portion (left passage area 412) through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass;
First passage detection means (function for executing winning processing by the main controller 81) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion;
Second passage detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage portion (function for executing detection processing of the left passage area by the main controller 81);
Using the detection result by the first passing detection means, the first notification execution means (the function of executing the production process by the production control device 82) for executing the first information (information for the jackpot) by the predetermined notification means )and,
A second notification (error notification) that uses the detection result of the first passage detection means and the detection result of the second passage detection means to execute the second notification (error notification) by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means. Notification execution means (function for executing error notification processing by the effect control device 82),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the game in which the game ball is shot toward the game area, the first passage portion and the second passage portion are provided in the game area, and when only the first passage portion is passed, A first notification is made, and a second notification is made when the vehicle has passed through the first passage portion and the second passage portion. As a result, in addition to the game of simply aiming at the first passage portion and the second passage portion, the player is made to pass through the first passage portion and then through the second passage portion, or is made to pass through the second passage portion and then the first passage. It is possible to play a game such as passing through a part, and diversification of the game can be achieved.

In addition, for example, if you pass through one passage section and then pass through the other passage section, a different privilege will be given, etc., and if you pass through one passage section without passing through the other passage section, it is different from the progress of the game. In the case of a configuration in which another process is performed, the player can easily grasp that the other process has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games by performing notifications corresponding to various games.

Feature N2. Provided with privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined granting condition,
The game ball passing through the first passing portion is included in the granting condition, while the passing of the game ball through the second passing portion is set so as not to be included in the granting condition. The gaming machine according to feature N1.

According to the above configuration, passing through the first passing section is included in the granting condition, so it is considered that the player should be informed that the privilege will be granted by reporting it alone. On the other hand, since passing through the second passing section is not included in the granting condition, even if it is notified alone, the player needs to grasp the notification that is not linked to the granting of the privilege, which is rather annoying. It may cause Therefore, if the information that the player has passed through the second passing section is reported together with the information that the player has passed through the first passing section, which leads to the provision of a privilege, as in the feature N1, it is thought that the player will be more likely to take an interest in the player. . Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to each notification.

Feature N3. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2, wherein the second passing section is provided as one of the paths leading to the first passing section on the upstream side of the first passing section.

According to the above configuration, the second passing portion is one of the paths leading to the first passing portion, and it can be said that the game ball can pass through even if a normal shooting operation is performed. In other words, the second pass is different from the area that is passed through for unusual and fraudulent purposes. If it is an area that is passed through for illegal purposes, it is considered that if passing through the second passing section is detected, notification should be promptly given without waiting for passage through the first passing section. On the other hand, since the above configuration is not an area that is passed through for such fraudulent purposes, it is meaningful to wait for passage of the first passing portion before giving notification, as in the feature M1.

Feature N4. Accessory having variable ball entry means (open/close accessory 168) provided in the game area and displaceable between an open state in which game balls are easy to enter and a closed state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than the open state. means (accessory device 150),
The accessory means is provided with a plurality of passage areas through which the entering game ball passes,
The game machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the first passing portion and the second passing portion are formed in the passing area.

According to the above configuration, the passage information of the first passage portion and the second passage portion of the passage area in the accessory means can be notified by the first notification and the second notification. That is, when the game ball entering the accessory means passes through the first passage part without passing through the second passage part, the first notification is performed, and the game ball passes through the second passage part and makes the first passage. After passing through the part, a second notification is given. In this way, by informing the route through which the game ball in the accessory means has passed by each notification, for example, content such as which route is likely to reach the first passage part, and which route leads to the first passage part It is possible to let the player, the manager of the game hall, etc. grasp the contents such as whether it is difficult or not. As a player, it is possible to proceed with the game advantageously by using the information on the ease of access. It is also possible to determine that there is a high possibility that an action has been performed, and the management of the game hall manager or the like can be facilitated.

Feature N5. Transition means (main A gaming machine according to feature N4, characterized by comprising a function of executing game state transition processing by the control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature N4 can be exhibited in association with the transition to the special state. That is, according to the first notification, it is possible to notify that the vehicle has transitioned to the special state without passing through the second passage portion, and according to the second notification, it is possible to notify that the vehicle has passed through the second passage portion and shifted to the special state. can be made known. Therefore, the player can grasp the route that easily shifts to the special state, and the manager of the game hall can grasp it if the transition route to the special state is far from the design value.

Feature N6. The special state is set so that the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state,
Limiting means capable of limiting the execution of the second notification by the second notification executing means during the special state (function for executing the passing area processing by the main controller 81 in the thirteenth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature N5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the special state occurs, the variable ball-entering means is in the open state, so that the ball can be easily entered into the accessory means. Therefore, compared to before the transition to the special state, the possibility of passing through the second passing section also increases, and the frequency with which the second notification is performed can also increase. Here, as described in feature N4, the second notification is for notifying the information of the route leading to the first passing section, and such second notification is frequently performed during the special state. As a result, the player may not be able to enjoy the special state. Therefore, by restricting the second notification during the special state, it becomes possible to fully enjoy the special state.

Feature N7. Said second notification execution means, when the first passage detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the first passage portion a plurality of times, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first passage The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein the second notification is executed using the detection result of the detection means and the detection result of the second passage detection means.

According to the above configuration, the second notification is triggered not by one passage through the first passing section but by multiple occurrences (or elapse of a period that can occur multiple times) as a trigger. In this way, not only can the frequency of the second notification be reduced, but also the passage rate of the first passage section and the second passage section can be notified. Therefore, information on the route leading to the first passing section can be reported as more accurate information than single-shot reporting.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. A game machine installed on an island facility of a game hall where multiple machines of the same model can be installed,
time management means (RTC counter of RAM 144) for managing the passage of time;
Based on the fact that the time managed by the time management means reaches a predetermined time, a predetermined effect executing means (RTC effect by the effect control device 82) that executes a predetermined effect by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51) function to execute processing for
Predetermined event grasping means for grasping the occurrence of a predetermined event (function for executing error processing by the effect control device 82);
with
Limiting means (effect A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing error notification processing by a control device 82).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event by the presence or absence of the execution of the predetermined effect and the deviation of the execution timing that occur based on the predetermined time. In recent years, the variety and sophistication of game machine effects have progressed. There is a risk that the manager of the game hall or the like will not notice the notification because it will be buried in the presentation. Therefore, when the same model is installed, if the effect of the same model is used and the fact that the effect is not performed or the execution timing of the effect is shifted, the manager of the game hall etc., it becomes possible to grasp it easily. Therefore, the predetermined event can be notified with a simple configuration.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined time is set so that the predetermined effect is periodically executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the predetermined event by restricting the predetermined effect that is performed periodically. The predetermined period of time that is periodically executed is, for example, every hour, every 30 minutes, or a cycle that can occur multiple times during the business hours of the game hall (for example, 14 hours). It is preferable to set

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2, wherein the predetermined event grasping means is capable of grasping the occurrence of the predetermined event at a timing earlier than the predetermined time.

Feature O4. Equipped with specific event grasping means for grasping the occurrence of a specific event that makes it impossible or difficult to continue the game (function for executing fraud detection processing by the main controller 81),
Special notification execution means ( A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, characterized by comprising a function of executing fraud notification processing by the effect control device 82 .

According to the above configuration, the special notification is executed when the specific event that makes it impossible or difficult to continue the game occurs. On the other hand, when a predetermined event occurs, execution of the predetermined effect is restricted. In this way, by distinguishing a specific event from a predetermined event and providing separate notifications, notifications with different purposes, such as an emergency notification (occurrence of a specific event) and a non-emergency notification (occurrence of a predetermined event), A suitable notification mode can be adopted according to each purpose.

Specific events that make it impossible or difficult to continue the game include, for example, the detection of fraudulent activity such as magnetic detection or vibration detection, the detection of game media clogging in the game media payout passage, etc. , and when it is detected that the power is cut off or the door of the game machine is opened.

Feature O5. The special notification executing means is configured to be capable of executing the special notification without waiting for the occurrence of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means when the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific event grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature O4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to substantially achieve the effect of feature O4.

Feature O6. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the limiting means permits time management by the time managing means when limiting the predetermined effect.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined effect is limited, only the execution of the predetermined effect or the execution timing when the predetermined time is reached is limited, and the time managed by the time management means is not changed. Therefore, for example, when the predetermined event is resolved, it is possible to carry out the predetermined performance as usual without restricting it, and it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity of the predetermined performance from being reduced recklessly.

Feature O7. The limiting means is arranged so that even if the occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped by the predetermined event grasping means before the predetermined time, the predetermined event grasping means does not detect the occurrence of the predetermined event at the timing when the predetermined time comes. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics O1 to O5, wherein the predetermined effect is not restricted if the state is not comprehended.

According to the above configuration, even if a predetermined event occurs before the predetermined time comes, if the predetermined event is canceled when the predetermined time comes, the predetermined performance can be generated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the chances of executing the predetermined effect from being recklessly reduced.

Feature O8. Provided with privilege giving means (payout control device 97, function of executing game state transition processing by main control device 81, etc.) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined giving condition. ,
The predetermined event grasping means grasps the occurrence of the predetermined event by using information (detection results of the passage detection sensors 402 to 404) not included in the given condition. The gaming machine according to any one of O7.

According to the above configuration, it can be said that the predetermined event is grasped based on the specific information that is not involved in granting the privilege. In this case, even if the predetermined event occurs, it is considered that the effect on awarding of the privilege is small, and even if the predetermined event is not promptly notified, the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined effect on the effect side is used as a mode for notifying the occurrence of such a predetermined event, it is possible to achieve a well-balanced notification between simplification of the management of the game hall and the disadvantage given to the player. It becomes possible to

When this configuration is applied to the configuration of feature O4, if "the specific event grasping means grasps the occurrence of the specific event using the information included in the granting condition", the predetermined event and the specific event can be made clearer.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in each invention of each feature A to O group described above may be applied to each invention of each feature A to O group. It may be applied to each invention of O group. Further, all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to O can be arbitrarily combined.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

10... Pachinko machine 24... Game board 38... First operating port 39... Second operating port 51... Symbol display device 60... Launch handle 81... Main control device 82... Effect control device 150... Role Object device 168 Opening and closing accessory 182a V winning opening 182b Exit opening 192 V winning sensor 193 Removal sensor 300 First distribution member 300a First distribution drive unit 310 Second distribution member 310a Second distribution drive unit 402 Left passage detection sensor 403 Right passage detection sensor 404 Back passage detection sensor 412 Left passage area 413 Right passage area 414 … deep passage area.

Claims (1)

a shooting means for shooting a game ball based on a player's shooting operation;
a ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means;
grant determination means capable of executing grant determination of granting a privilege to a player when a game ball enters the ball entering means;
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination by a predetermined effect means when the grant determination means performs the grant determination;
distribution means for distributing game balls shot by the shooting means to a plurality of paths;
a grasping means for grasping the ball passage of each path;
A calculating means capable of calculating a predetermined ratio that can occur within the range of normal operation of the gaming machine using the plurality of ball passing results grasped by the grasping means;
with
The calculation means is capable of executing the calculation processing so that the ball passing result in a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than in a normal state is not included in the predetermined ratio,
a first control means comprising at least the provision determination means, the grasping means and the calculation means;
A second control means comprising at least the effect executing means;
has
The first control means is provided separately from the second control means, and includes means capable of outputting the calculation result of the calculation means to means provided so as not to be visually recognized by the player ,
It is characterized by comprising means capable of updating the control state for outputting the calculation result when the number of game balls passing through the predetermined passage area reaches a predetermined specific number. game machine.

Images